TMX320C6411ZLZ [TI]

FIXED POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR; 定点数字信号处理器
TMX320C6411ZLZ
型号: TMX320C6411ZLZ
厂家: TEXAS INSTRUMENTS    TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
描述:

FIXED POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR
定点数字信号处理器

数字信号处理器
文件: 总119页 (文件大小:1727K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
D
D
Low-Cost, High-Performance Fixed-Point  
DSP − TMS320C6411  
− 3.33-ns Instruction Cycle Time  
− 300-MHz Clock Rate  
− Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle  
− Twenty-Eight Operations/Cycle  
− 2400 MIPS  
− Fully Software-Compatible With  
TMS320C62x  
VelociTI.2Extensions to VelociTI  
Advanced Very-Long-Instruction-Word  
(VLIW) TMS320C64xDSP Core  
− Eight Highly Independent Functional  
Units With VelociTI.2Extensions:  
− Six ALUs (32-/40-Bit), Each Supports  
Single 32-Bit, Dual 16-Bit, or Quad  
8-Bit Arithmetic per Clock Cycle  
− Two Multipliers Support  
D
D
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)  
Controller (64 Independent Channels)  
Host-Port Interface (HPI)  
− User-Configurable Bus Width (32-/16-Bit)  
− Access to Entire Memory Map  
D
32-Bit/33-MHz, 3.3-V Peripheral Component  
Interconnect (PCI) Master/Slave Interface  
Conforms to PCI Specification 2.2  
− Access to Entire Memory Map  
− Three PCI Bus Address Registers:  
Prefetchable Memory  
Non-Prefetchable Memory I/O  
− Four-Wire Serial EEPROM Interface  
− PCI Interrupt Request Under DSP  
Program Control  
− DSP Interrupt Via PCI I/O Cycle  
D
Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports  
(McBSPs)  
− Direct Interface to T1/E1, MVIP, SCSA  
Framers  
− ST-Bus-Switching Compatible  
− Up to 256 Channels Each  
− AC97-Compatible  
− Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
Compatible (Motorola)  
Four 16 x 16-Bit Multiplies  
(32-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle or  
Eight 8 x 8-Bit Multiplies  
(16-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle  
− Non-Aligned Load-Store Architecture  
− 64 32-Bit General-Purpose Registers  
− Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size  
− All Instructions Conditional  
D
D
Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers  
D
D
Instruction Set Features  
− Byte-Addressable (8-/16-/32-/64-Bit Data)  
− 8-Bit Overflow Protection  
− Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear  
− Normalization, Saturation, Bit-Counting  
− VelociTI.2Increased Orthogonality  
L1/L2 Memory Architecture  
− 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1P Program Cache  
(Direct Mapped)  
− 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1D Data Cache  
(2-Way Set-Associative)  
− 2M-Bit (256K-Byte) L2 Unified Mapped  
RAM/Cache (Flexible RAM/Cache  
Allocation)  
Sixteen General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins  
− Programmable Interrupt/Event  
Generation Modes  
D
D
D
D
D
Flexible PLL Clock Generator  
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG )  
Boundary-Scan-Compatible  
532-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package  
(GLZ and ZLZ Suffix), 0.8-mm Ball Pitch  
0.13-µm/6-Level Copper Metal Process  
− CMOS Technology  
3.3-V I/Os, 1.2-V Internal  
D
32-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF)  
− Glueless Interface to Asynchronous  
Memories (SRAM and EPROM) and  
Synchronous Memories (SDRAM,  
SBSRAM, ZBT SRAM, and FIFO)  
− 512M-Byte Total Addressable External  
Memory Space  
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of  
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.  
TMS320C62x, VelociTI.2, VelociTI, and TMS320C64x are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
Motorola is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.  
IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.  
ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢎꢗ ꢆ ꢀꢋ ꢑ ꢒ ꢎ ꢔꢀꢔ ꢘꢙ ꢚ ꢛꢜ ꢝ ꢞꢟ ꢘꢛꢙ ꢘꢠ ꢡꢢ ꢜ ꢜ ꢣꢙꢟ ꢞꢠ ꢛꢚ ꢤꢢꢥ ꢦꢘꢡ ꢞꢟ ꢘꢛꢙ ꢧꢞ ꢟꢣ ꢨ  
ꢐꢜ ꢛ ꢧꢢꢡ ꢟ ꢠ ꢡ ꢛꢙ ꢚꢛ ꢜ ꢝ ꢟ ꢛ ꢠ ꢤꢣ ꢡ ꢘꢚ ꢘꢡꢞ ꢟꢘ ꢛꢙꢠ ꢤꢣ ꢜ ꢟꢩ ꢣ ꢟꢣ ꢜ ꢝꢠ ꢛꢚ ꢀꢣꢪ ꢞꢠ ꢋꢙꢠ ꢟꢜ ꢢꢝ ꢣꢙꢟ ꢠ  
ꢠ ꢟ ꢞ ꢙꢧ ꢞ ꢜꢧ ꢫ ꢞ ꢜꢜ ꢞ ꢙ ꢟꢬꢨ ꢐꢜ ꢛ ꢧꢢꢡ ꢟꢘꢛꢙ ꢤꢜ ꢛꢡ ꢣꢠ ꢠꢘ ꢙꢭ ꢧꢛꢣ ꢠ ꢙꢛꢟ ꢙꢣ ꢡꢣ ꢠꢠ ꢞꢜ ꢘꢦ ꢬ ꢘꢙꢡ ꢦꢢꢧ ꢣ  
ꢟ ꢣ ꢠ ꢟꢘ ꢙꢭ ꢛꢚ ꢞ ꢦꢦ ꢤꢞ ꢜ ꢞ ꢝ ꢣ ꢟ ꢣ ꢜ ꢠ ꢨ  
Copyright 2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
1
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Table of Contents  
revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
device characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram . . . . . . . . . . 10  
CPU (DSP core) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
memory map summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
peripheral register descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
EDMA channel synchronization event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
interrupt sources and interrupt selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
signal groups description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
device configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
debugging considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
development support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
device support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
clock PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
absolute maximum ratings over operating case  
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of  
supply voltage and operating case temperature . 68  
recommended clock and control signal transition  
behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
parameter measurement information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
input and output clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
asynchronous memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
programmable synchronous interface timing . . . . . . . . 78  
synchronous DRAM timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
HOLD/HOLDA timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
BUSREQ timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
reset timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
external interrupt timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
host-port interface (HPI) timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) timing . . . . . . 99  
multichannel buffered serial port (McBSP) timing . . . . 102  
timer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) port timing . . . . 114  
JTAG test-port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
mechanical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
power-down mode logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
power-supply sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
power-supply decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
EMIF device speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
bootmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
2
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
REVISION HISTORY  
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS196G device-specific data  
sheet to make it an SPRS196H revision.  
Scope: Applicable updates to the C64x device family, specifically relating to the C6411 devices, have been incor-  
porated. Added C6411A silicon revision 2.0 devices and associated device-specific information at the product  
data (PD) stage of development.  
The extended temperature devices for silicon revision 2.0 (C641x A-5E0, C641xA-6E3) are at the advance infor-  
mation (AI) stage of development. All other devices are at the Production Data (PD) stage of development.  
PAGE(S)  
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS  
NO.  
6
GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view) section:  
Added “and ZLZ” to the “GLZ 532-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE (BOTTOM VIEW)” figure title  
Added a ZLZ clarification footnote to the GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view) figure  
7
Description section:  
“With performance of up to 2400 million instructions per second (MIPS) ...” paragraph  
Changed “The C6411 can produce two 32-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per ...” sentence to “The C6411 can produce  
four 16-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per ...”  
8
Table 1, Characteristics of the C6411 Processor:  
Changed the EDMA INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE reference from CPU Clock Frequency” to CPU/2 Clock Frequency”  
15  
L2 architecture expanded section:  
Added new section  
Added Figure 2, TMS320C6411 L2 Architecture Memory Configuration  
17  
20  
Peripheral register descriptions section:  
Table 5, L2 Cache Registers:  
Added “Reserved” row “0184 1004 − 0184 1FFC”  
Changed “Reserved” row “0184 4050 −0184 4FFFto “0184 4050 −0184 4FFC”  
Peripheral register descriptions section:  
EDMA Parameter RAM table:  
Updated associated table footnote from “The C64x device ...” to “The C6411 device ...”  
55  
Added “device support” section title (new)  
55−56  
Device and development-support tool nomenclature section:  
Updated/changed “Table 1 displays the device part numbers and ordering information for ...” paragraph  
Deleted the “TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with ...” paragraph  
Figure 5, TMS320C6411 DSP Device Nomenclature:  
Updated/changed the “For the actual device part number (P/N), ...” footnote  
Added, below Figure 5, “For additional information, see the TMS320C6411 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature  
number SPRZ194)” paragraph (new)  
57  
Documentation support section:  
Deleted “See the Worldwide Web URL for Texas Instruments” from the SPRA718 and SPRA374 reference paragraph  
Moved the SPRA718 and SPRA374 reference paragraph up  
3
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PAGE(S)  
NO.  
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS  
64  
Power-supply decoupling section:  
Updated/changed the “In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors ...”  
paragraph  
Added two subsequent paragraphs  
65  
66  
75  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement section:  
Updated/added paragraphs for clarity  
Reset section:  
Added new section  
Asynchronous Memory Timing section:  
Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles table:  
Added/split silicon revisions “Rev 1.1” and “Rev 2.0” for the MIN value of parameter #7 “t  
valid after ECLKOUTx high”  
, Hold time, ARDY  
h(EKO1H-ARDY)  
Added the MIN value of “1.3” ns for “Rev 2.0”  
89  
91  
HOLD/HOLDA Timing section:  
Timing Requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA Cycles table:  
Changed parameter NO. 3 from “t  
to “t ”  
oh(HOLDAL-HOLDL) h(HOLDAL-HOLDL)  
Reset Timing section:  
Timing Requirements for Reset table:  
Changed the MIN value of parameter No. 16, t  
from “4P” to “4E or 4C” ns  
su(boot)  
Added associated footnote to identify “E” and “C”  
Added parameter NO. 18, “t Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” with a MIN value of “32N” ns  
d(PCLK−RSTH)  
Changed parameter NO. 18 description from “t  
Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” to “t ,  
su(PCLK-RSTH)  
d(PCLK−RSTH)  
Setup time, PCLK active before RESET high”  
Added associated footnote to identify “N” and restraints  
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset table:  
Moved parameter NO. 18, “t  
table  
Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” to the Timing Requirements for Reset  
d(PCLK−RSTH)  
Updated footnote symbols  
94  
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing section:  
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port Interface Cycles table:  
Added “mode, 2nd half-word” to parameter NO. 16 “t , Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 only)”  
d(HSTBL-HDV)  
103−104 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing section:  
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP table:  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #12 “t , Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
CLKX high, CLKX extfrom 2.1” to “2.0” ns  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #13 “t  
“2.0 + D1” ns  
, Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid, CLKX extfrom 2.1 + D1” to  
d(CKXH-DXV)  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #14 “t  
, Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX intfrom “−2.3” to  
d(FXH-DXV)  
h
“−2.3 + D1 ” ns  
Changed the MAX value of parameter #14 “t  
, Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX intfrom “5.6” to  
d(FXH-DXV)  
h
“5.6 + D2 ” ns  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #14 “t  
, Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX extfrom “1.9” to  
d(FXH-DXV)  
h
“1.9 + D1 ” ns  
h
Changed the MAX value of parameter #14 “t  
, Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX extfrom “9” to “9 + D2 ” ns  
d(FXH-DXV)  
Added associated footnote  
Figure 51, McBSP Timing:  
Added footnote for clarity  
4
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PAGE(S)  
NO.  
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS  
101  
PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) TIMING section:  
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Serial EEPROM Interface table:  
Changed parameter NO. 6 description from “t , Output setup time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high” to  
osu(DOV-CLKH)  
, Output setup time, XSP_DO valid before XSP_CLK high”  
“t  
osu(DOV-CLKH)  
114  
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port Timing section:  
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs table:  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #3 “t  
Changed the MIN value of parameter #4 “t  
Added associated footnote  
, Pulse duration, GPOx high” from “32P” to “24P − 8” ns  
w(GPOH)  
, Pulse duration, GPOx low” from “32P” to “24P − 8” ns  
w(GPOL)  
116  
MECHANICAL DATA section:  
Deleted the “GLZ and ZLZ (S-PBGA-N532), PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY” mechanical data package diagram; now an  
automated merged process  
Added the “thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [ZLZ]” table  
Added lead-in sentence for the thermal resistance characteristics table(s) and the “merged” mechanical data packages  
5
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view)  
GLZ and ZLZ 532-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE  
(BOTTOM VIEW)  
AF  
AD  
AB  
Y
AE  
AC  
AA  
W
U
V
T
R
P
N
M
K
L
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
5
7
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25  
2
4
6
8
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26  
The ZLZ mechanical package designator represents the version of the GLZ package with lead-free balls. For more detailed information  
see the Mechanical Data section of this document.  
6
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
description  
The TMS320C64xDSPs (including the TMS320C6411 device) are the highest-performance fixed-point DSP  
generation in the TMS320C6000DSP platform. The TMS320C6411 (C6411) device is based on the  
second-generation high-performance, advanced VelociTIvery-long-instruction-word (VLIW) architecture  
(VelocTI.2) developed by Texas Instruments (TI), making these DSPs an excellent choice for multichannel  
and multifunction applications. The C64xis a code-compatible member of the C6000DSP platform.  
With performance of up to 2400 million instructions per second (MIPS) at a clock rate of 300 MHz, the C6411  
device offers cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP programming challenges. The C6411 DSP  
possesses the operational flexibility of high-speed controllers and the numerical capability of array processors.  
The C64xDSP core processor has 64 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length and eight highly  
independent functional units—two multipliers for a 32-bit result and six arithmetic logic units (ALUs)— with  
VelociTI.2extensions. The VelociTI.2extensions in the eight functional units include new instructions to  
accelerate the performance in key applications and extend the parallelism of the VelociTIarchitecture. The  
C6411 can produce four 16-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per cycle for a total of 600 million MACs per second  
(MMACS), or eight 8-bit MACs per cycle for a total of 2400 MMACS. The C6411 DSP also has  
application-specific hardware logic, on-chip memory, and additional on-chip peripherals similar to the other  
C6000DSP platform devices.  
The C6411 uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and diverse set of peripherals. The  
Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 128-Kbit direct mapped cache and the Level 1 data cache (L1D) is a 128-Kbit  
2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2 memory/cache (L2) consists of a 2-Mbit memory space that is shared  
between program and data space. L2 memory can be configured as mapped memory or combinations of cache  
(up to 256K bytes) and mapped memory. The peripheral set includes two multichannel buffered serial ports  
(McBSPs); three 32-bit general-purpose timers; a user-configurable 16-bit or 32-bit host-port interface  
(HPI16/HPI32); a peripheral component interconnect (PCI); a general-purpose input/output port (GPIO) with  
16 GPIO pins; and a glueless external memory interface (32-bit EMIF), which is capable of interfacing to  
synchronous and asynchronous memories and peripherals.  
The C6411 has a complete set of development tools which includes: a new C compiler, an assembly optimizer  
to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windowsdebugger interface for visibility into source code  
execution.  
TMS320C6000, C64x, and C6000 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.  
Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
7
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
device characteristics  
Table 1 provides an overview of the C6411 DSP. The table shows significant features of the C6411 device,  
including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package type with pin count.  
Table 1. Characteristics of the C6411 Processor  
INTERNAL CLOCK  
HARDWARE FEATURES  
EMIF (32-bit bus width)  
C6411  
SOURCE  
Peripherals  
ECLKIN  
1
EDMA (64 independent channels) CPU/2 Clock Frequency  
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable) CPU/4 Clock Frequency  
1
Not all peripherals pins are  
available at the same time.  
(For more details, see the  
Device Configuration  
section.)  
1 (HPI16 or HPI32)  
PCI (32-bit)  
PCLK  
1
2
3
McBSPs (McBSP0 and McBSP1)  
32-Bit Timers  
CPU/4 Clock Frequency  
CPU/8 Clock Frequency  
Peripheral performance is  
dependent on chip-level  
configuration.  
General-Purpose Input/Outputs  
(GPIOs)  
CPU/8 Clock Frequency  
16  
Size (Bytes)  
288K  
16K-Byte (16KB) L1 Program (L1P)  
Cache  
16KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache  
256KB Unified Mapped RAM/Cache (L2)  
On-Chip Memory  
Organization  
CPU ID + CPU Rev ID  
Device_ID  
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])  
0x0C01  
Silicon Revision Identification Register  
(DEVICE_REV [19:16])  
Address: 0x01B0 0200  
DEVICE_REV[19:16] Silicon Revision  
0010 or 0000  
0011  
1.1  
2.0  
Frequency  
Cycle Time  
MHz  
300  
ns  
3.33 ns  
1.2 V  
Core (V)  
Voltage  
I/O (V)  
3.3 V  
PLL Options  
CLKIN frequency multiplier  
Bypass (x1), x6  
532-Pin BGA (GLZ and ZLZ)  
0.13 µm  
BGA Package  
23 x 23 mm  
Process Technology  
µm  
Product Preview (PP)  
Advance Information (AI)  
Production Data (PD)  
Product Status  
PD (1.1, 2.0)  
(For more details on the C64xDSP part numbering, see  
Figure 5)  
TMS320C6411GLZ  
TMS320C6411AGLZ  
Device Part Numbers  
PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other  
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.  
ADVANCE INFORMATION concerns new products in the sampling or preproduction phase of development. Characteristic data and  
other specifications are subject to change without notice.  
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas  
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.  
8
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
device compatibility  
The C64xfamily of devices has a diverse and powerful set of peripherals. The common peripheral set that  
the C6411 and C6415 devices offer lead to easier system designs and faster time to market.  
The C6411 device is a low-cost C64x device which features significant enhancements from the C6211/C6211B  
devices and can be considered a subset of the C6415 device. Table 2 identifies the C6411 features in  
comparison with the C6211 and C6415 devices.  
†‡  
Table 2. C6211, C6411, and C6415 Device Comparison  
CPU/PERIPHERALS  
C6211/C6211B  
C62x  
C6411  
C64x  
C6415  
C64x  
DSP Core  
L1P (Program Cache)  
4 KB  
16 KB  
16 KB  
256 KB  
16 KB  
16 KB  
1024 KB  
L1D (Data Cache)  
4 KB  
L2 (Unified Mapped RAM/Cache)  
64 KB  
(1) 64-Bit(1) [EMIFA]  
(1) 16-Bit [EMIFB]  
programmable  
(1) 32-Bit EMIF  
programmable  
synchronous mode  
EMIF (64-, 32-, 16-bit bus width)  
(1) 32-Bit  
synchronous mode  
EDMA  
16  
64  
64  
(# of independent channels)  
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable)  
PCI (32-bit)  
16-Bit  
32-/16-Bit  
32-Bit, 33 MHz  
2 Enhanced  
32-/16-Bit  
32-Bit, 33 MHz  
3 Enhanced  
McBSPs (McBSP0, McBSP1, and McBSP2)  
2
(1) Transmit  
(1) Receive  
UTOPIA  
2
3
Timers (32-bit)  
[TIMER0, TIMER1, TIMER2]  
3
GPIOs (GP[15:0])  
Core Frequency (MHz)  
Core Voltage (V)  
16  
16  
150-, 167-MHz  
1.8 V  
300-MHz  
1.2 V  
500-, 600-MHz  
1.2 V to 1.4 V  
PLL Modes  
(x1 [Bypass], x4, x6, x12)  
x1, x4  
x1, x6  
x1, x6, x12  
256-pin BGA  
27 x 27 mm  
GFN suffix  
532-pin BGA  
23 x 23 mm  
GLZ suffix  
532-pin BGA  
23 x 23 mm  
GLZ suffix  
Package  
Process Technology  
0.18 µm  
0.13 µm  
0.13 µm  
— denotes peripheral/coprocessor is not available on this device.  
Not all peripherals pins are available at the same time. (For more details, see the Device Configuration section.)  
For more detailed information on the device compatibility and similarities/differences among the C6211, C6411,  
and C6415 devices, see the How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and  
TMS320C6416 DSPs application report (literature number SPRA718) and How To Begin Development Today  
With the TMS320C6411 DSP application report (literature number SPRA374).  
9
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram  
C6411 Digital Signal Processor  
SDRAM  
SBSRAM  
L1P Cache  
Direct-Mapped  
16K Bytes Total  
ZBT SRAM  
FIFO  
32  
EMIF  
SRAM  
C64x DSP Core  
ROM/FLASH  
I/O Devices  
Instruction Fetch  
Control  
Registers  
Instruction Dispatch  
Advanced Instruction Packet  
Control  
Logic  
Timer 2  
Timer 1  
Timer 0  
Instruction Decode  
Data Path A  
Data Path B  
Test  
A Register File  
A31−A16  
B Register File  
B31−B16  
Advanced  
In-Circuit  
Emulation  
A15−A0  
B15−B0  
.L1 .S1 .M1 .D1  
.D2 .M2 .S2 .L2  
Interrupt  
Control  
L2  
Memory  
256K  
Enhanced  
DMA  
Controller  
(64-channel)  
McBSP1  
McBSP0  
McBSPs:  
Bytes  
Framing Chips:  
H.100, MVIP,  
SCSA, T1, E1  
AC97 Devices,  
SPI Devices,  
Codecs  
L1D Cache  
2-Way Set-Associative  
16K Bytes Total  
9
7
GPIO[8:0]  
GPIO[15:9]  
32  
32  
HPI  
or  
Boot Configuration  
PCI  
Power-Down  
Logic  
PLL  
(x1, x6)  
Interrupt  
Selector  
The PCI peripheral is muxed with the HPI peripheral and the GPIO[15:9] port. For more details on the multiplexed pins of these  
peripherals, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
10  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
CPU (DSP core) description  
The CPU fetches VelociTIadvanced very-long instruction words (VLIWs) (256 bits wide) to supply up to eight  
32-bit instructions to the eight functional units during every clock cycle. The VelociTIVLIW architecture  
features controls by which all eight units do not have to be supplied with instructions if they are not ready to  
execute. The first bit of every 32-bit instruction determines if the next instruction belongs to the same execute  
packet as the previous instruction, or whether it should be executed in the following clock as a part of the next  
execute packet. Fetch packets are always 256 bits wide; however, the execute packets can vary in size. The  
variable-length execute packets are a key memory-saving feature, distinguishing the C64x CPUs from other  
VLIW architectures. The C64xVelociTI.2extensions add enhancements to the TMS320C62xDSP  
VelociTIarchitecture. These enhancements include:  
D
D
D
D
D
D
Register file enhancements  
Data path extensions  
Quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit extensions with data flow enhancements  
Additional functional unit hardware  
Increased orthogonality of the instruction set  
Additional instructions that reduce code size and increase register flexibility  
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file. One set contains  
functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2, .S2, and .L2. The two register files  
each contain 32 32-bit registers for a total of 64 general-purpose registers. In addition to supporting the packed  
16-bit and 32-/40-bit fixed-point data types found in the C62xVelociTIVLIW architecture, the C64xregister  
files also support packed 8-bit data and 64-bit fixed-point data types. The two sets of functional units, along with  
two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU [see the functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram,  
and Figure 1]. The four functional units on each side of the CPU can freely share the 32 registers belonging to  
that side. Additionally, each side features a “data cross path”—a single data bus connected to all the registers  
on the other side, by which the two sets of functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite  
side. The C64x CPU pipelines data-cross-path accesses over multiple clock cycles. This allows the same  
register to be used as a data-cross-path operand by multiple functional units in the same execute packet. All  
functional units in the C64x CPU can access operands via the data cross path. Register access by functional  
units on the same side of the CPU as the register file can service all the units in a single clock cycle. On the C64x  
CPU, a delay clock is introduced whenever an instruction attempts to read a register via a data cross path if that  
register was updated in the previous clock cycle.  
In addition to the C62xDSP fixed-point instructions, the C64xDSP includes a comprehensive collection of  
quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit instruction set extensions. These VelociTI.2extensions allow the C64x CPU to  
operate directly on packed data to streamline data flow and increase instruction set efficiency.  
Another key feature of the C64x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions operate on registers  
(as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1 and .D2) are responsible for all data  
transfers between the register files and the memory. The data address driven by the .D units allows data  
addresses generated from one register file to be used to load or store data to or from the other register file. The  
C64x .D units can load and store bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits), and words (32 bits) with a single instruction.  
And with the new data path extensions, the C64x .D unit can load and store doublewords (64 bits) with a single  
instruction. Furthermore, the non-aligned load and store instructions allow the .D units to access words and  
doublewords on any byte boundary. The C64x CPU supports a variety of indirect addressing modes using either  
linear- or circular-addressing with 5- or 15-bit offsets. All instructions are conditional, and most can access any  
one of the 64 registers. Some registers, however, are singled out to support specific addressing modes or to  
hold the condition for conditional instructions (if the condition is not automatically “true”).  
TMS320C62x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.  
11  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)  
The two .M functional units perform all multiplication operations. Each of the C64x .M units can perform two  
16 × 16-bit multiplies or four 8 × 8-bit multiplies per clock cycle. The .M unit can also perform 16 × 32-bit multiply  
operations, dual 16 × 16-bit multiplies with add/subtract operations, and quad 8 × 8-bit multiplies with add  
operations. In addition to standard multiplies, the C64x .M units include bit-count, rotate, Galois field multiplies,  
and bidirectional variable shift hardware.  
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch functions with results  
available every clock cycle. The arithmetic and logical functions on the C64x CPU include single 32-bit, dual  
16-bit, and quad 8-bit operations.  
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a program memory.  
The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are “linked” together by “1” bits in the least  
significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions that are “chained” together for simultaneous  
execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute packet. A “0” in the LSB of an instruction breaks the chain,  
effectively placing the instructions that follow it in the next execute packet. A C64xDSP device enhancement  
now allows execute packets to cross fetch-packet boundaries. In the TMS320C62x/TMS320C67xDSP  
devices, if an execute packet crosses the fetch-packet boundary (256 bits wide), the assembler places it in the  
next fetch packet, while the remainder of the current fetch packet is padded with NOP instructions. In the C64x  
DSP device, the execute boundary restrictions have been removed, thereby, eliminating all of the NOPs added  
to pad the fetch packet, and thus, decreasing the overall code size. The number of execute packets within a  
fetch packet can vary from one to eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at  
the rate of one per clock cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from  
the current fetch packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive all active  
functional units for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle. While most results are  
stored in 32-bit registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as bytes, half-words, words, or  
doublewords. All load and store instructions are byte-, half-word-, word-, or doubleword-addressable.  
For more details on the C64x CPU functional units enhancements, see the following documents:  
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189)  
TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395)  
How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6411 DSP application report (literature number  
SPRA374)  
TMS320C67x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.  
12  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)  
src1  
.L1  
src2  
dst  
8
long dst  
long src  
8
32 MSBs  
32 LSBs  
ST1b (Store Data)  
ST1a (Store Data)  
8
long src  
long dst  
dst  
8
Register  
File A  
src1  
(A0−A31)  
.S1  
Data Path A  
src2  
See Note A  
See Note A  
long dst  
dst  
src1  
.M1  
src2  
32 MSBs  
32 LSBs  
LD1b (Load Data)  
LD1a (Load Data)  
dst  
DA1 (Address)  
src1  
.D1  
.D2  
src2  
2X  
1X  
src2  
src1  
dst  
DA2 (Address)  
32 LSBs  
32 MSBs  
LD2a (Load Data)  
LD2b (Load Data)  
src2  
src1  
dst  
.M2  
See Note A  
See Note A  
long dst  
Register  
File B  
(B0− B31)  
src2  
Data Path B  
.S2  
src1  
dst  
long dst  
long src  
8
8
32 MSBs  
32 LSBs  
ST2a (Store Data)  
ST2b (Store Data)  
8
long src  
long dst  
dst  
8
src2  
.L2  
src1  
Control Register  
File  
NOTE A: For the .M functional units, the long dst is 32 MSBs and the dst is 32 LSBs.  
Figure 1. TMS320C64xCPU (DSP Core) Data Paths  
13  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
memory map summary  
Table 3 shows the memory map address ranges of the C6411 device. Internal memory is always located at  
address 0 and can be used as both program and data memory. The external memory address range in the  
C6411 device begins at the hex address location 0x8000 0000 for the EMIF.  
Table 3. TMS320C6411 Memory Map Summary  
BLOCK SIZE  
(BYTES)  
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION  
Internal RAM (L2)  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
256K  
0000 0000 – 0003 FFFF  
0004 0000 – 017F FFFF  
0180 0000 – 0183 FFFF  
0184 0000 – 0187 FFFF  
0188 0000 – 018B FFFF  
018C 0000 – 018F FFFF  
0190 0000 – 0193 FFFF  
0194 0000 – 0197 FFFF  
0198 0000 – 019B FFFF  
019C 0000 – 019F FFFF  
01A0 0000 – 01A3 FFFF  
01A4 0000 – 01AB FFFF  
01AC 0000 – 01AF FFFF  
01B0 0000 – 01B3 FFFF  
01B4 0000 – 01BF FFFF  
01C0 0000 – 01C3 FFFF  
01C4 0000 – 01FF FFFF  
0200 0000 – 0200 0033  
0200 0034 – 2FFF FFFF  
3000 0000 – 33FF FFFF  
3400 0000 – 37FF FFFF  
3800 0000 – 7FFF FFFF  
8000 0000 – 8FFF FFFF  
9000 0000 – 9FFF FFFF  
A000 0000 – AFFF FFFF  
B000 0000 – BFFF FFFF  
C000 0000 – FFFF FFFF  
Reserved  
24M − 256K  
256K  
External Memory Interface (EMIF) Registers  
L2 Registers  
256K  
HPI Registers  
256K  
McBSP 0 Registers  
McBSP 1 Registers  
Timer 0 Registers  
Timer 1 Registers  
Interrupt Selector Registers  
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers  
Reserved  
256K  
256K  
256K  
256K  
256K  
256K  
512K  
Timer 2 Registers  
GPIO Registers  
Reserved  
256K  
256K  
768K  
PCI Registers  
256K  
Reserved  
4M – 256K  
52  
QDMA Registers  
Reserved  
736M – 52  
64M  
McBSP 0 Data  
McBSP 1 Data  
64M  
Reserved  
1G + 128M  
256M  
256M  
256M  
256M  
1G  
EMIF CE0  
EMIF CE1  
EMIF CE2  
EMIF CE3  
Reserved  
The number of EMIF address pins (EA[22:3]) limits the maximum addressable memory (SDRAM) to 128MB per CE space.  
To get 256MB of addressable memory, an additional general-purpose output pin or external logic is required.  
14  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
L2 architecture expanded  
Figure 2 shows the detail of the L2 architecture on the TMS320C6411 device. For more information on the  
L2MODE bits, see the cache configuration (CCFG) register bit field descriptions in the TMS320C64x  
Two-Level Internal Memory Reference Guide (literature number SPRU610).  
L2MODE  
010  
L2 Memory  
Block Base Address  
000  
001  
011  
111  
0x0000 0000  
128K-Byte SRAM  
0x0002 0000  
64K-Byte RAM  
0x0003 0000  
32K-Byte RAM  
32K-Byte RAM  
0x0003 8000  
0x0003 FFFF  
Figure 2. TMS320C6411 L2 Architecture Memory Configuration  
15  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions  
Table 4 through Table 17 identify the peripheral registers for the C6411 device by their register names,  
acronyms, and hex address or hex address range. For more detailed information on the register contents, bit  
names and their descriptions, see the specific peripheral reference guide listed in the TMS320C6000 DSP  
Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).  
Table 4. EMIF Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
0180 0000  
ACRONYM  
GBLCTL  
CECTL1  
CECTL0  
REGISTER NAME  
EMIF global control  
EMIF CE1 space control  
EMIF CE0 space control  
Reserved  
0180 0004  
0180 0008  
0180 000C  
0180 0010  
CECTL2  
CECTL3  
SDCTL  
SDTIM  
SDEXT  
EMIF CE2 space control  
EMIF CE3 space control  
EMIF SDRAM control  
EMIF SDRAM refresh control  
EMIF SDRAM extension  
Reserved  
0180 0014  
0180 0018  
0180 001C  
0180 0020  
0180 0024 − 0180 003C  
0180 0040  
PDTCTL  
CESEC1  
CESEC0  
Peripheral device transfer (PDT) control  
EMIF CE1 space secondary control  
EMIF CE0 space secondary control  
Reserved  
0180 0044  
0180 0048  
0180 004C  
0180 0050  
CESEC2  
CESEC3  
EMIF CE2 space secondary control  
EMIF CE3 space secondary control  
Reserved  
0180 0054  
0180 0058 − 0183 FFFF  
16  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 5. L2 Cache Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
0184 0000  
ACRONYM  
CCFG  
REGISTER NAME  
Cache configuration register  
Reserved  
COMMENTS  
0184 0004 −0184 0FFC  
0184 1000  
EDMAWEIGHT  
L2 EDMA access control register  
Reserved  
0184 1004 − 0184 1FFC  
0184 2000  
L2ALLOC0  
L2ALLOC1  
L2ALLOC2  
L2ALLOC3  
L2 allocation register 0  
L2 allocation register 1  
L2 allocation register 2  
L2 allocation register 3  
Reserved  
0184 2004  
0184 2008  
0184 200C  
0184 2010 −0184 3FFF  
0184 4000  
L2WBAR  
L2WWC  
L2WIBAR  
L2WIWC  
L2IBAR  
L2IWC  
L2 writeback base address register  
L2 writeback word count register  
0184 4004  
0184 4010  
L2 writeback-invalidate base address register  
L2 writeback-invalidate word count register  
L2 invalidate base address register  
L2 invalidate word count register  
0184 4014  
0184 4018  
0184 401C  
0184 4020  
L1PIBAR  
L1PIWC  
L1DWIBAR  
L1DWIWC  
L1P invalidate base address register  
L1P invalidate word count register  
0184 4024  
0184 4030  
L1D writeback-invalidate base address register  
L1D writeback-invalidate word count register  
Reserved  
0184 4034  
0184 4038 −0184 4044  
0184 4048  
L1DIBAR  
L1DIWC  
L1D invalidate base address register  
L1D invalidate word count register  
Reserved  
0184 404C  
0184 4050 −0184 4FFC  
0184 5000  
L2WB  
L2 writeback all register  
0184 5004  
L2WBINV  
L2 writeback-invalidate all register  
Reserved  
0184 5008 −0184 7FFF  
MAR0 to  
MAR127  
0184 8000 −0184 81FC  
Reserved  
0184 8200  
0184 8204  
0184 8208  
0184 820C  
0184 8210  
0184 8214  
0184 8218  
0184 821C  
0184 8220  
0184 8224  
0184 8228  
0184 822C  
MAR128  
MAR129  
MAR130  
MAR131  
MAR132  
MAR133  
MAR134  
MAR135  
MAR136  
MAR137  
MAR138  
MAR139  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8000 0000 − 80FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8100 0000 − 81FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8200 0000 − 82FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8300 0000 − 83FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8400 0000 − 84FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8500 0000 − 85FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8600 0000 − 86FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8700 0000 − 87FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8800 0000 − 88FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8900 0000 − 89FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8A00 0000 − 8AFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8B00 0000 − 8BFF FFFF  
17  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 5. L2 Cache Registers (Continued)  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
0184 8230  
0184 8234  
0184 8238  
0184 823C  
0184 8240  
0184 8244  
0184 8248  
0184 824C  
0184 8250  
0184 8254  
0184 8258  
0184 825C  
0184 8260  
0184 8264  
0184 8268  
0184 826C  
0184 8270  
0184 8274  
0184 8278  
0184 827C  
0184 8280  
0184 8284  
0184 8288  
0184 828C  
0184 8290  
0184 8294  
0184 8298  
0184 829C  
0184 82A0  
0184 82A4  
0184 82A8  
0184 82AC  
0184 82B0  
0184 82B4  
0184 82B8  
0184 82BC  
0184 82C0  
0184 82C4  
0184 82C8  
0184 82CC  
0184 82D0  
0184 82D4  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
MAR140  
MAR141  
MAR142  
MAR143  
MAR144  
MAR145  
MAR146  
MAR147  
MAR148  
MAR149  
MAR150  
MAR151  
MAR152  
MAR153  
MAR154  
MAR155  
MAR156  
MAR157  
MAR158  
MAR159  
MAR160  
MAR161  
MAR162  
MAR163  
MAR164  
MAR165  
MAR166  
MAR167  
MAR168  
MAR169  
MAR170  
MAR171  
MAR172  
MAR173  
MAR174  
MAR175  
MAR176  
MAR177  
MAR178  
MAR179  
MAR180  
MAR181  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8C00 0000 − 8CFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8D00 0000 − 8DFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8E00 0000 − 8EFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE0 range 8F00 0000 − 8FFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9000 0000 − 90FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9100 0000 − 91FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9200 0000 − 92FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9300 0000 − 93FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9400 0000 − 94FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9500 0000 − 95FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9600 0000 − 96FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9700 0000 − 97FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9800 0000 − 98FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9900 0000 − 99FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9A00 0000 − 9AFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9B00 0000 − 9BFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9C00 0000 − 9CFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9D00 0000 − 9DFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9E00 0000 − 9EFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE1 range 9F00 0000 − 9FFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A000 0000 − A0FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A100 0000 − A1FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A200 0000 − A2FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A300 0000 − A3FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A400 0000 − A4FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A500 0000 − A5FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A600 0000 − A6FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A700 0000 − A7FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A800 0000 − A8FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range A900 0000 − A9FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AA00 0000 − AAFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AB00 0000 − ABFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AC00 0000 − ACFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AD00 0000 − ADFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AE00 0000 − AEFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE2 range AF00 0000 − AFFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B000 0000 − B0FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B100 0000 − B1FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B200 0000 − B2FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B300 0000 − B3FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B400 0000 − B4FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B500 0000 − B5FF FFFF  
18  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 5. L2 Cache Registers (Continued)  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
0184 82D8  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
MAR182  
MAR183  
MAR184  
MAR185  
MAR186  
MAR187  
MAR188  
MAR189  
MAR190  
MAR191  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B600 0000 − B6FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B700 0000 − B7FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B800 0000 − B8FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range B900 0000 − B9FF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BA00 0000 − BAFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BB00 0000 − BBFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BC00 0000 − BCFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BD00 0000 − BDFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BE00 0000 − BEFF FFFF  
Controls EMIF CE3 range BF00 0000 − BFFF FFFF  
0184 82DC  
0184 82E0  
0184 82E4  
0184 82E8  
0184 82EC  
0184 82F0  
0184 82F4  
0184 82F8  
0184 82FC  
MAR192 to  
MAR255  
0184 8300 −0184 83FC  
0184 8400 −0187 FFFF  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Table 6. EDMA Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
01A0 FF9C  
01A0 FFA4  
01A0 FFA8  
01A0 FFAC  
01A0 FFB0  
01A0 FFB4  
01A0 FFB8  
01A0 FFBC  
01A0 FFC0  
01A0 FFC4  
01A0 FFC8  
01A0 FFCC  
01A0 FFDC  
01A0 FFE0  
01A0 FFE4  
01A0 FFE8  
01A0 FFEC  
01A0 FFF0  
01A0 FFF4  
01A0 FFF8  
01A0 FFFC  
ACRONYM  
EPRH  
CIPRH  
CIERH  
CCERH  
ERH  
REGISTER NAME  
Event polarity high register  
Channel interrupt pending high register  
Channel interrupt enable high register  
Channel chain enable high register  
Event high register  
EERH  
ECRH  
ESRH  
PQAR0  
PQAR1  
PQAR2  
PQAR3  
EPRL  
Event enable high register  
Event clear high register  
Event set high register  
Priority queue allocation register 0  
Priority queue allocation register 1  
Priority queue allocation register 2  
Priority queue allocation register 3  
Event polarity low register  
PQSR  
CIPRL  
CIERL  
CCERL  
ERL  
Priority queue status register  
Channel interrupt pending low register  
Channel interrupt enable low register  
Channel chain enable low register  
Event low register  
EERL  
Event enable low register  
ECRL  
Event clear low register  
ESRL  
Event set low register  
01A1 0000 − 01A3 FFFF  
Reserved  
19  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 7. EDMA Parameter RAM  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
01A0 0000 − 01A0 0017  
01A0 0018 − 01A0 002F  
01A0 0030 − 01A0 0047  
01A0 0048 − 01A0 005F  
01A0 0060 − 01A0 0077  
01A0 0078 − 01A0 008F  
01A0 0090 − 01A0 00A7  
01A0 00A8 − 01A0 00BF  
01A0 00C0 − 01A0 00D7  
01A0 00D8 − 01A0 00EF  
01A0 00F0 − 01A0 00107  
01A0 0108 − 01A0 011F  
01A0 0120 − 01A0 0137  
01A0 0138 − 01A0 014F  
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167  
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F  
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167  
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F  
...  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 16 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 17 (6 words)  
...  
COMMENTS  
...  
...  
01A0 05D0 − 01A0 05E7  
01A0 05E8 − 01A0 05FF  
01A0 0600 − 01A0 0617  
01A0 0618 − 01A0 062F  
...  
Parameters for Event 62 (6 words)  
Parameters for Event 63 (6 words)  
Reload/link parameters for Event M (6 words)  
Reload/link parameters for Event N (6 words)  
...  
01A0 07E0 − 01A0 07F7  
01A0 07F8 − 01A0 07FF  
Reload/link parameters for Event Z (6 words)  
Scratch pad area (2 words)  
The C6411 device has twenty-one parameter sets [six (6) words each] that can be used to reload/link EDMA transfers.  
Table 8. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
0200 0000  
ACRONYM  
QOPT  
REGISTER NAME  
QDMA options parameter register  
0200 0004  
QSRC  
QCNT  
QDMA source address register  
QDMA frame count register  
QDMA destination address register  
QDMA index register  
0200 0008  
0200 000C  
QDST  
0200 0010  
QIDX  
0200 0014 − 0200 001C  
0200 0020  
Reserved  
QSOPT  
QSSRC  
QSCNT  
QSDST  
QSIDX  
QDMA pseudo options register  
QDMA psuedo source address register  
QDMA psuedo frame count register  
QDMA destination address register  
QDMA psuedo index register  
0200 0024  
0200 0028  
0200 002C  
0200 0030  
20  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 9. Interrupt Selector Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
Selects which interrupts drive CPU  
interrupts 10−15 (INT10−INT15)  
019C 0000  
MUXH  
Interrupt multiplexer high  
Selects which interrupts drive CPU  
interrupts 4−9 (INT04−INT09)  
019C 0004  
MUXL  
Interrupt multiplexer low  
Sets the polarity of the external  
interrupts (EXT_INT4−EXT_INT7)  
019C 0008  
EXTPOL  
External interrupt polarity  
Reserved  
019C 000C − 019C 01FF  
Table 10. McBSP 0 Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
The CPU and EDMA  
controller can only read this  
register; they cannot write to  
it.  
018C 0000  
DRR0  
McBSP0 data receive register via Configuration Bus  
0x3000 0000 − 0x33FF FFFF  
018C 0004  
DRR0  
DXR0  
McBSP0 data receive register via Peripheral Data Bus  
McBSP0 data transmit register via Configuration Bus  
McBSP0 data transmit register via Peripheral Data Bus  
McBSP0 serial port control register  
0x3000 0000 − 0x33FF FFFF  
018C 0008  
DXR0  
SPCR0  
RCR0  
018C 000C  
McBSP0 receive control register  
018C 0010  
XCR0  
McBSP0 transmit control register  
018C 0014  
SRGR0  
MCR0  
McBSP0 sample rate generator register  
018C 0018  
McBSP0 multichannel control register  
018C 001C  
RCERE00  
XCERE00  
PCR0  
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 0  
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0  
McBSP0 pin control register  
018C 0020  
018C 0024  
018C 0028  
RCERE10  
XCERE10  
RCERE20  
XCERE20  
RCERE30  
XCERE30  
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 1  
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1  
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 2  
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2  
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 3  
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3  
Reserved  
018C 002C  
018C 0030  
018C 0034  
018C 0038  
018C 003C  
018C 0040 − 018F FFFF  
21  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 11. McBSP 1 Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
The CPU and EDMA  
controller can only read this  
register; they cannot write to  
it.  
0190 0000  
DRR1  
Data receive register via Configuration Bus  
0x3400 0000 − 0x37FF FFFF  
0190 0004  
DRR1  
DXR1  
McBSP1 data receive register via Peripheral Data Bus  
McBSP1 data transmit register via Configuration Bus  
McBSP1 data transmit register via Peripheral Data Bus  
McBSP1 serial port control register  
0x3400 0000 − 0x37FF FFFF  
0190 0008  
DXR1  
SPCR1  
RCR1  
0190 000C  
McBSP1 receive control register  
0190 0010  
XCR1  
McBSP1 transmit control register  
0190 0014  
SRGR1  
MCR1  
McBSP1 sample rate generator register  
0190 0018  
McBSP1 multichannel control register  
0190 001C  
RCERE01  
XCERE01  
PCR1  
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 0  
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0  
McBSP1 pin control register  
0190 0020  
0190 0024  
0190 0028  
RCERE11  
XCERE11  
RCERE21  
XCERE21  
RCERE31  
XCERE31  
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 1  
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1  
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 2  
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2  
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 3  
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3  
Reserved  
0190 002C  
0190 0030  
0190 0034  
0190 0038  
0190 003C  
0190 0040 − 0193 FFFF  
22  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 12. Timer 0 Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
Determines the operating  
mode of the timer, monitors the  
timer status, and controls the  
function of the TOUT pin.  
0194 0000  
CTL0  
Timer 0 control register  
Timer 0 period register  
Contains the number of timer  
input clock cycles to count.  
This number controls the  
TSTAT signal frequency.  
0194 0004  
PRD0  
Contains the current value of  
the incrementing counter.  
0194 0008  
CNT0  
Timer 0 counter register  
Reserved  
0194 000C − 0197 FFFF  
Table 13. Timer 1 Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
Determines the operating  
mode of the timer, monitors the  
timer status, and controls the  
function of the TOUT pin.  
0198 0000  
CTL1  
Timer 1 control register  
Timer 1 period register  
Contains the number of timer  
input clock cycles to count.  
This number controls the  
TSTAT signal frequency.  
0198 0004  
PRD1  
Contains the current value of  
the incrementing counter.  
0198 0008  
CNT1  
Timer 1 counter register  
Reserved  
0198 000C − 019B FFFF  
Table 14. Timer 2 Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
Determines the operating  
mode of the timer, monitors the  
timer status, and controls the  
function of the TOUT pin.  
01AC 0000  
CTL2  
Timer 2 control register  
Timer 2 period register  
Contains the number of timer  
input clock cycles to count.  
This number controls the  
TSTAT signal frequency.  
01AC 0004  
PRD2  
Contains the current value of  
the incrementing counter.  
01AC 0008  
CNT2  
Timer 2 counter register  
Reserved  
01AC 000C − 01AF FFFF  
23  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 15. HPI Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
COMMENTS  
HPID  
HPI data register  
Host read/write access only  
HPIC has both Host/CPU  
read/write access  
0188 0000  
0188 0004  
0188 0008  
HPIC  
HPIA  
HPI control register  
HPI address register  
(Write)  
(HPIAW)  
HPIA has both Host/CPU  
read/write access  
HPIA  
(HPIAR)  
HPI address register  
(Read)  
0188 000C − 0189 FFFF  
018A 0000  
TRCTL  
Reserved  
HPI transfer request control register  
Reserved  
018A 0004 − 018B FFFF  
Host access to the HPIA register updates both the HPIAW and HPIAR registers. The CPU can access HPIAW and HPIAR independently.  
Table 16. GPIO Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
01B0 0000  
ACRONYM  
GPEN  
GPDIR  
GPVAL  
REGISTER NAME  
GPIO enable register  
01B0 0004  
GPIO direction register  
GPIO value register  
Reserved  
01B0 0008  
01B0 000C  
01B0 0010  
GPDH  
GPHM  
GPDL  
GPLM  
GPGC  
GPPOL  
GPIO delta high register  
GPIO high mask register  
GPIO delta low register  
GPIO low mask register  
GPIO global control register  
GPIO interrupt polarity register  
Reserved  
01B0 0014  
01B0 0018  
01B0 001C  
01B0 0020  
01B0 0024  
01B0 0028 − 01B0 01FF  
Silicon Revision Identification Register  
(For more details, see the device characteristics listed in Table 1.)  
01B0 0200  
DEVICE_REV  
01B0 0204 − 01B3 FFFF  
Reserved  
24  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
peripheral register descriptions (continued)  
Table 17. PCI Peripheral Registers  
HEX ADDRESS RANGE  
01C0 0000  
ACRONYM  
RSTSRC  
REGISTER NAME  
DSP Reset source/status register  
Reserved  
01C0 0004  
01C0 0008  
PCIIS  
PCIIEN  
DSPMA  
PCIMA  
PCIMC  
CDSPA  
CPCIA  
CCNT  
PCI interrupt source register  
PCI interrupt enable register  
DSP master address register  
PCI master address register  
PCI master control register  
Current DSP address register  
Current PCI address register  
Current byte count register  
Reserved  
01C0 000C  
01C0 0010  
01C0 0014  
01C0 0018  
01C0 001C  
01C0 0020  
01C0 0024  
01C0 0028  
01C0 002C − 01C1 FFEF  
0x01C1 FFF0  
0x01C1 FFF4  
0x01C1 FFF8  
0x01C1 FFFC  
01C2 0000  
Reserved  
HSR  
Host status register  
HDCR  
DSPP  
Host-to-DSP control register  
DSP page register  
Reserved  
EEADD  
EEDAT  
EECTL  
EEPROM address register  
EEPROM data register  
EEPROM control register  
Reserved  
01C2 0004  
01C2 0008  
01C2 000C − 01C2 FFFF  
01C3 0000  
TRCTL  
PCI transfer request control register  
01C3 0004 − 01C3 FFFF  
Reserved  
25  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
EDMA channel synchronization events  
The C64x EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external memory.  
Table 18 lists the source of C64x EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable  
EDMA channels. For the C6411 device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the EDMA  
channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured in the EDMA event  
registers (ERL, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers (EERL, EERH). The  
priority of each event can be specified independently in the transfer parameters stored in the EDMA parameter  
RAM. For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled, captured,  
processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory Access  
(EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).  
Table 18. TMS320C6411 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events  
EDMA  
CHANNEL  
EVENT NAME  
EVENT DESCRIPTION  
0
1
DSP_INT  
TINT0  
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt  
Timer 0 interrupt  
2
TINT1  
Timer 1 interrupt  
3
SD_INT  
EMIF SDRAM timer interrupt  
GPIO event 4/External interrupt pin 4  
GPIO event 5/External interrupt pin 5  
GPIO event 6/External interrupt pin 6  
GPIO event 7/External interrupt pin 7  
GPIO event 0  
4
GPINT4/EXT_INT4  
GPINT5/EXT_INT5  
GPINT6/EXT_INT6  
GPINT7/EXT_INT7  
GPINT0  
5
6
7
8
9
GPINT1  
GPIO event 1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16−18  
19  
20−47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56−63  
GPINT2  
GPIO event 2  
GPINT3  
GPIO event 3  
XEVT0  
McBSP0 transmit event  
McBSP0 receive event  
McBSP1 transmit event  
McBSP1 receive event  
None  
REVT0  
XEVT1  
REVT1  
TINT2  
Timer 2 interrupt  
None  
GPINT8  
GPIO event 8  
GPINT9  
GPIO event 9  
GPINT10  
GPINT11  
GPINT12  
GPINT13  
GPINT14  
GPINT15  
GPIO event 10  
GPIO event 11  
GPIO event 12  
GPIO event 13  
GPIO event 14  
GPIO event 15  
None  
In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate transfer  
completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory  
Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).  
26  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
interrupt sources and interrupt selector  
The C64x DSP core supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 19. The highest-priority interrupt  
is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest-priority interrupt is INT_15. The first four interrupts  
(INT_00−INT_03) are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining interrupts (INT_04−INT_15) are maskable and  
default to the interrupt source specified in Table 19. The interrupt source for interrupts 4−15 can be programmed  
by modifying the selector value (binary value) in the corresponding fields of the Interrupt Selector Control  
registers: MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004).  
Table 19. C6411 DSP Interrupts  
INTERRUPT  
CPU  
INTERRUPT  
NUMBER  
SELECTOR  
VALUE  
(BINARY)  
INTERRUPT  
EVENT  
SELECTOR  
CONTROL  
REGISTER  
INTERRUPT SOURCE  
INT_00  
INT_01  
INT_02  
INT_03  
INT_04  
INT_05  
INT_06  
INT_07  
INT_08  
INT_09  
INT_10  
RESET  
NMI  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved. Do not use.  
Reserved. Do not use.  
MUXL[4:0]  
MUXL[9:5]  
MUXL[14:10]  
MUXL[20:16]  
MUXL[25:21]  
MUXL[30:26]  
MUXH[4:0]  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
00011  
GPINT4/EXT_INT4 GPIO interrupt 4/External interrupt pin 4  
GPINT5/EXT_INT5 GPIO interrupt 5/External interrupt pin 5  
GPINT6/EXT_INT6 GPIO interrupt 6/External interrupt pin 6  
GPINT7/EXT_INT7 GPIO interrupt 7/External interrupt pin 7  
EDMA_INT  
EMU_DTDMA  
SD_INT  
EDMA channel (0 through 63) interrupt  
EMU DTDMA  
EMIF SDRAM timer interrupt  
EMU real-time data exchange (RTDX)  
receive  
INT_11  
MUXH[9:5]  
01010  
EMU_RTDXRX  
INT_12  
MUXH[14:10]  
01011  
00000  
EMU_RTDXTX  
DSP_INT  
TINT0  
EMU RTDX transmit  
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt  
Timer 0 interrupt  
INT_13  
MUXH[20:16]  
INT_14  
MUXH[25:21]  
00001  
INT_15  
MUXH[30:26]  
00010  
TINT1  
Timer 1 interrupt  
01100  
XINT0  
McBSP0 transmit interrupt  
McBSP0 receive interrupt  
McBSP1 transmit interrupt  
McBSP1 receive interrupt  
GPIO interrupt 0  
01101  
RINT0  
01110  
XINT1  
01111  
RINT1  
10000  
GPINT0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
TINT2  
10001  
Reserved. Do not use.  
Reserved. Do not use.  
Timer 2 interrupt  
10010  
10011  
10100 − 11111  
Reserved  
Reserved. Do not use.  
Interrupts INT_00 through INT_03 are non-maskable and fixed.  
Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15 are programmable by modifying the binary selector values in the Interrupt Selector Control  
registers fields. Table 19 shows the default interrupt sources for Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15. For more detailed  
information on interrupt sources and selection, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Interrupt Selector Reference Guide (literature  
number SPRU646).  
27  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
signal groups description  
RESET  
NMI  
CLKIN  
CLKOUT4/GP1  
GP7/EXT_INT7  
GP6/EXT_INT6  
GP5/EXT_INT5  
GP4/EXT_INT4  
Reset and  
Interrupts  
CLKOUT6/GP2  
Clock/PLL  
CLKMODE0  
PLLV  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
TMS  
TDO  
TDI  
TCK  
Reserved  
TRST  
EMU0  
EMU1  
EMU2  
EMU3  
EMU4  
EMU5  
EMU6  
EMU7  
EMU8  
EMU9  
EMU10  
EMU11  
IEEE Standard  
1149.1  
(JTAG)  
Emulation  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
Peripheral  
Control and  
Configuration  
PCI_EN  
LEND  
BOOTMODE [1:0]  
ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]  
EEAI  
HD5/AD5  
Control/Status  
§
GP7/EXT_INT7  
GP15/PRST  
§
§
GP6/EXT_INT6  
GP14/PCLK  
GP5/EXT_INT5  
GP13/PINTA  
§
GP4/EXT_INT4  
GP12/PGNT  
GPIO  
§
GP3  
GP11/PREQ  
§
CLKOUT6/GP2  
GP10/PCBE3  
§
CLKOUT4/GP1  
GP9/PIDSEL  
GP0  
GP8  
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port  
These pins are muxed with the GPIO port pins and by default these signals function as clocks (CLKOUT4 or CLKOUT6). To use  
these muxed pins as GPIO signals, the appropriate GPIO register bits (GPxEN and GPxDIR) must be properly enabled and  
configured. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
§
These pins are GPIO pins that can also function as external interrupt sources (EXT_INT[7:4]). Default after reset is EXT_INTx or  
GPIO as input-only.  
These GPIO pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral pins and by default these signals are set up to no function with both the GPIO  
and PCI pin functions disabled. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
Figure 3. CPU and Peripheral Signals  
28  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
signal groups description (continued)  
32  
Data  
ED[31:0]  
ECLKIN  
ECLKOUT1  
CE3  
CE2  
ECLKOUT2  
SDCKE  
Memory Map  
Space Select  
External  
Memory I/F  
Control  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
CE1  
CE0  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
ARDY  
20  
Address  
EA[22:3]  
SOE3  
PDT  
BE3  
BE2  
BE1  
BE0  
Byte Enables  
HOLD  
Bus  
Arbitration  
HOLDA  
BUSREQ  
EMIF (32-bit)  
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals  
29  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
signal groups description (continued)  
HPI  
(Host-Port Interface)  
32  
Data  
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]  
HAS/PPAR  
HR/W/PCBE2  
HCS/PPERR  
HDS1/PSERR  
HDS2/PCBE1  
HRDY/PIRDY  
HCNTL0/PSTOP  
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL  
Register Select  
Control  
Half-Word  
Select  
HHWIL/PTRDY  
(HPI16 ONLY)  
HINT/PFRAME  
32  
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]  
Data/Address  
Clock  
GP14/PCLK  
GP9/PIDSEL  
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL  
HINT/PFRAME  
GP13/PINTA  
HAS/PPAR  
GP15/PRST  
GP10/PCBE3  
HR/W/PCBE2  
HDS2/PCBE1  
PCBE0  
Command  
Byte Enable  
Control  
HRDY/PIRDY  
HCNTL0/PSTOP  
HHWIL/PTRDY  
GP12/PGNT  
GP11/PREQ  
Arbitration  
HDS1/PSERR  
HCS/PPERR  
Error  
XSP_DO  
XSP_CS  
XSP_CLK  
XSP_DI  
Serial  
EEPROM  
PCI Interface  
These HPI pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral. By default, these signals function as HPI. For more details on these muxed pins,  
see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
These PCI pins (excluding PCBE0 , XSP_DO, XSP_CLK, XSP_DI, and XSP_CS) are muxed with the HPI or GPIO peripherals. By  
default, these signals function as HPI and no function, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device  
Configurations section of this data sheet.  
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)  
30  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
signal groups description (continued)  
McBSP1  
Transmit  
McBSP0  
Transmit  
CLKX0  
FSX0  
DX0  
CLKX1  
FSX1  
DX1  
CLKR1  
FSR1  
DR1  
CLKR0  
FSR0  
Receive  
Clock  
Receive  
Clock  
DR0  
CLKS0  
CLKS1  
McBSPs  
(Multichannel Buffered  
Serial Ports)  
TOUT1  
TOUT0  
TINP0  
Timer 0  
Timers  
Timer 1  
TINP1  
TOUT2  
TINP2  
Timer 2  
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)  
31  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS  
The C6411 peripheral selections and other device configurations are determined by external pullup/pulldown  
resistors on the following pins (all of which are latched during device reset):  
D peripherals selection  
PCI_EN  
D other device configurations  
LEND  
BOOTMODE [1:0]  
ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]  
EEAI  
HD5/AD5  
peripherals selection  
Some C6411 peripherals share the same pins (internally muxed) and are mutually exclusive (i.e., HPI,  
general-purpose input/output pins GP[15:9], and PCI). Other C6411 peripherals (i.e., EMIF, three Timers, two  
McBSPs, and the GP[8:0] pins), are always available.  
D
HPI/GP[15:9] versus PCI  
The PCI_EN pin is latched at reset. This pin determines the HPI/GP[15:9] versus the PCI peripheral  
selection, summarized in Table 20.  
32  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)  
Table 20. PCI_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI/GP[15:9] or PCI)  
PERIPHERALS SELECTED  
PCI_EN Pin  
[AA4]  
HPI  
GP[15:9]  
PCI  
DESCRIPTION  
[default] HPI is enabled, GP[15:9] pins can be programmed as GPIO, PCI is  
disabled.  
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as HPI and all standalone PCI  
pins (PCBE0, XSP_DO, XSP_DI, XSP_CLK, and XSP_CS) are tied-off (Hi-Z).  
Also, the multiplexed GPIO/PCI pins can be used as GPIO with the proper  
software configuration of the GPIO enable (GPxEN) and direction (GPxDIR)  
registers (for more details, see Table 22).  
0
PCI is enabled, HPI/GP[15:9] are disabled.  
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as PCI. Also, the multiplexed  
GPIO/PCI pins function as PCI pins (for more details, see Table 22).  
1
Auto-initialization through PCI EEPROM or initialization via specified PCI default  
values is controlled by the EEAI pin, see Table 21.  
The PCI_EN pin is latched at reset and must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.  
other device configurations  
Table 21 describes the C6411 device configuration pins, which are set up via external pullup/pulldown resistors  
through the specified pins. For more details on these device configuration pins, see the Terminal Functions table  
and the Debugging Considerations section.  
33  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)  
Table 21. Device Configuration Pins (LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], EEAI, and HD5/AD5)  
CONFIGURATION  
NO.  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
PIN  
Device Endian mode (LEND)  
LEND  
E16  
0
1
System operates in Big Endian mode  
System operates in Little Endian mode (default)  
Bootmode [1:0]. Default is reserved. External pullup and/or pulldown resistors must be used to select a  
valid bootmode configuration.  
[D18,  
C18]  
00 – No boot  
01 − HPI boot  
BOOTMODE[1:0]  
ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]  
10 − Reserved  
11 − EMIF 8-bit ROM boot with default timings (default mode)  
EMIF input clock select  
Clock mode select for EMIF (ECLKIN_SEL[1:0])  
00 – ECLKIN (default mode)  
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate  
[B18,  
A18]  
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate  
11 − Reserved  
PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI)  
PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM  
0
1
PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified  
PCI default values (default).  
PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured  
through EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1).  
EEAI  
B17  
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.  
For more information on the PCI EEPROM default values, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripheral  
Component Interconnect (PCI) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU581).  
HPI configuration bus width (HPI_WIDTH)  
0
HPI operates as an HPI16.  
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are  
reserved pins in the Hi-Z state.)  
HD5/AD5  
Y1  
1
HPI operates as an HPI32.  
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)  
34  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)  
multiplexed pins  
Multiplexed pins are pins that are shared by more than one peripheral and are internally multiplexed. Some of  
these pins are configured by software, and the others are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors only  
at reset. Those muxed pins that are configured by software can be programmed to switch functionalities at any  
time. Those muxed pins that are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors are mutually exclusive; only  
one peripheral has primary control of the function of these pins after reset. Table 22 identifies the multiplexed  
pins on the C6411 device; shows the default (primary) function and the default settings after reset; and describes  
the pins, registers, etc. necessary to configure specific multiplexed functions.  
debugging considerations  
It is recommended that external connections be provided to device configuration pins, including CLKMODE0,  
LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]. EEAI, HD5/AD5, and PCI_EN. Although internal pullup/pulldown  
resistors exist on these pins, providing external connectivity adds convenience to the user in debugging and  
flexibility in switching operating modes.  
Internal pullup/pulldown resistors also exist on specified reserved (RSV) pins. Do not oppose the internal  
pullup/pulldown resistors, unless otherwised noted, on these RSV pins.  
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the terminal functions table.  
35  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)  
Table 22. C6411 Device Multiplexed Pins  
MULTIPLEXED PINS  
NAME  
DEFAULT FUNCTION  
DEFAULT SETTING  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
These pins are software-configurable.  
To use these pins as GPIO pins, the  
GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable  
Register and the GPxDIR bits in the  
GPIO Direction Register must be  
properly configured.  
CLKOUT4/GP1  
AE6  
CLKOUT4  
GP1EN = 0 (disabled)  
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled  
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input  
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output  
CLKOUT6/GP2  
AD6  
CLKOUT6  
GP2EN = 0 (disabled)  
GP9/PIDSEL  
GP10/PCBE3  
GP11/PREQ  
M3  
L2  
F1  
J3  
To use GP[15:9] as GPIO pins, the PCI  
needs to be disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the  
GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable  
Register and the GPxDIR bits in the  
GPIO Direction Register must be  
properly configured.  
GPxEN = 0 (disabled)  
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)  
GP12/PGNT  
None  
GP13/PINTA  
G4  
F2  
G3  
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled  
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input  
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output  
GP14/PCLK  
GP15/PRST  
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]  
HAS/PPAR  
HD[31:0]  
HAS  
T3  
R1  
T4  
T1  
T2  
P1  
R3  
R4  
R2  
P4  
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL  
HCNTL0/PSTOP  
HDS1/PSERR  
HDS2/PCBE1  
HR/W/PCBE2  
HHWIL/PTRDY  
HINT/PFRAME  
HCS/PPERR  
HRDY/PIRDY  
HCNTL1  
HCNTL0  
HDS1  
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset  
(PCI is disabled).  
To enable the PCI peripheral an external  
pullup resistor (1 k) must be provided  
on the PCI_EN pin (setting PCI_EN = 1  
at reset and keeping valid “1” after  
reset).  
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)  
HDS2  
HR/W  
HHWIL (HPI16 only)  
HINT  
HCS  
HRDY  
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION  
Clock Input. This clock is the input to the  
on-chip PLL.  
CLKIN  
H4  
I
IPD  
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed  
(O/Z) [default] or this pin can be pro-  
grammed as a GPIO 1 pin (I/O/Z).  
§
§
CLKOUT4/GP1  
AE6  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed  
(O/Z) [default] or this pin can be pro-  
grammed as a GPIO 2 pin (I/O/Z).  
CLKOUT6/GP2  
AD6  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
All other standalone PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled [PCI_EN = 0].  
For the HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] multiplexed pins pin numbers, see the Terminal Functions table.  
36  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
DESCRIPTION  
TYPE  
NO.  
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION (CONTINUED)  
Clock mode select  
Selects whether the CPU clock frequency = input clock frequency x1 (Bypass) [default] or  
x6.  
For more details on the CLKMODE0 pin and the PLL multiply factors, see the Clock PLL  
section of this data sheet.  
CLKMODE0  
H2  
J6  
I
IPD  
#
A
PLLV  
PLL voltage supply  
JTAG EMULATION  
TMS  
TDO  
TDI  
AB16  
AE19  
AF18  
AF16  
I
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
JTAG test-port mode select  
JTAG test-port data out  
JTAG test-port data in  
JTAG test-port clock  
O/Z  
I
I
TCK  
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG  
Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet.  
TRST  
AB15  
I
IPD  
EMU11  
EMU10  
EMU9  
EMU8  
EMU7  
EMU6  
EMU5  
EMU4  
EMU3  
EMU2  
AC18  
AD18  
AE18  
AC17  
AF17  
AD17  
AE17  
AC16  
AD16  
AE16  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
Emulation pin 11. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 10. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 9. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 8. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 7. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 6. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.  
Emulation [1:0] pins  
Select the device functional mode of operation  
EMU[1:0]  
Operation  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Boundary Scan/Normal Mode (see Note)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Emulation/Normal Mode [default] (see the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG  
Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet)  
EMU1  
EMU0  
AC15  
AF15  
I/O/Z  
IPU  
Normal mode refers to the DSPs normal operational mode, when the DSP is free running. The  
DSP can be placed in normal operational mode when the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for  
either Boundary Scan or Emulation.  
Note: When the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for Boundary Scan mode, the internal pulldown  
(IPD) on the TRST signal must not be opposed in order to operate in Normal mode.  
For the Boundary Scan mode pulldown EMU[1:0] pins with a dedicated 1-kresister.  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.  
A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)  
§
#
37  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
Device Endian mode  
LEND  
E16  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
IPU  
LEND:  
0
1
Big Endian  
Little Endian (default mode)  
Host-Port bus width (HPI_WIDTH) user-configurable at device reset via a 10-kresistor  
pullup/pulldown resistor on the HD5 pin:  
HD5 pin = 0: HPI operates as an HPI16.  
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are  
reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)  
§
HD5/AD5  
Y1  
HD5 pin = 1: HPI operates as an HPI32.  
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)  
PCI enable pin. This pin controls the selection (enable/disable) of the HPI and GP[15:9], or  
PCI peripherals. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
PCI_EN  
EEAI  
AA4  
B17  
I
IPD  
IPD  
PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI) via external EEPROM  
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.  
I/O/Z  
EEAI: 0  
1
PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).  
PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled.  
Boot mode. Default is reserved. External pullup and/or pulldown resistors must be used to  
select a valid bootmode configuration.  
BOOTMODE1  
BOOTMODE0  
D18  
C18  
IPU  
IPD  
BOOTMODE[1:0]: 00 – No boot  
01 − HPI boot  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
10 − Reserved  
11 − EMIF 8-bit ROM boot with default timings (default mode)  
EMIF clock mode select  
ECLKIN_SEL1  
ECLKIN_SEL0  
B18  
A18  
ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]: 00 – ECLKIN (default mode)  
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate  
IPD  
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate  
11 − Reserved  
RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS  
RESET  
AC7  
B4  
I
Device reset  
NMI  
I
IPD  
IPU  
Nonmaskable interrupt, edge-driven (rising edge)  
GP7/EXT_INT7  
GP6/EXT_INT6  
GP5/EXT_INT5  
GP4/EXT_INT4  
AF4  
AD5  
AE5  
AF5  
G3  
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) pins (I/O/Z) or external interrupts (input only). The  
default after reset setting is GPIO enabled as input-only.  
When these pins function as External Interrupts [by selecting the corresponding interrupt  
enable register bit (IER.[7:4])], they are edge-driven and the polarity can be independently  
selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]).  
I/O/Z  
§
GP15/PRST  
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at default.  
GPIO 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.  
§
GP14/PCLK  
F2  
§
GP13/PINTA  
G4  
GPIO 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.  
GPIO 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.  
GPIO 3 pin (I/O/Z).  
§
§
GP12/PGNT  
J3  
I/O/Z  
GP11/PREQ  
F1  
§
GP10/PCBE3  
L2  
§
GP9/PIDSEL  
GP3  
M3  
AC6  
IPD  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
§
38  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS (CONTINUED)  
GPIO 0 pin.  
The general-purpose I/O 0 pin (GPIO 0) (I/O/Z) can be programmed as GPIO 0 (input only)  
[default] or as GPIO 0 (output only) pin or output as a general-purpose interrupt (GP0INT)  
signal (output only).  
GP0  
AF6  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
This pin has no function at default [default] or this pin can be programmed as a GPIO 8 pin  
(I/O/Z).  
GP8  
AE4  
AD6  
AE6  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a  
GPIO 2 pin (I/O/Z).  
§
§
CLKOUT6/GP2  
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a  
GPIO 1 pin (I/O/Z).  
CLKOUT4/GP1  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI)  
HINT/  
PFRAME  
R4  
R1  
T4  
R3  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
Host interrupt from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI frame (I/O/Z)  
§
HCNTL1/  
PDEVSEL  
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI device  
select (I/O/Z).  
§
HCNTL0/  
PSTOP  
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI stop  
(I/O/Z)  
§
Host half-word select − first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low order)  
[For HPI16 bus width selection only] (I) [default] or PCI target ready (I/O/Z)  
§
HHWIL/PTRDY  
§
HR/W/PCBE2  
P1  
T3  
R2  
T1  
T2  
P4  
J2  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
Host read or write select (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 2 (I/O/Z)  
Host address strobe (I) [default] or PCI parity (I/O/Z)  
§
HAS/PPAR  
§
HCS/PPERR  
Host chip select (I) [default] or PCI parity error (I/O/Z)  
§
HDS1/PSERR  
Host data strobe 1 (I) [default] or PCI system error (I/O/Z)  
Host data strobe 2 (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 1 (I/O/Z)  
Host ready from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI initiator ready (I/O/Z).  
§
HDS2/PCBE1  
§
HRDY/PIRDY  
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
HD31/AD31  
HD30/AD30  
HD29/AD29  
HD28/AD28  
HD27/AD27  
HD26/AD26  
HD25/AD25  
HD24/AD24  
HD23/AD23  
HD22/AD22  
HD21/AD21  
HD20/AD20  
HD19/AD19  
HD18/AD18  
HD17/AD17  
HD16/AD16  
HD15/AD15  
K3  
J1  
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI data-address bus (I/O/Z)  
K4  
K2  
L3  
As HPI data bus (PCI_EN pin = 0)  
Used for transfer of data, address, and control  
Host-Port bus width (HPI_WIDTH) user-configurable at device reset via a 10-kresistor  
K1  
L4  
pullup/pulldown resistor on the HD5 pin:  
HD5 pin = 0: HPI operates as an HPI16.  
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are  
reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)  
L1  
I/O/Z  
M4  
M2  
N4  
M1  
N5  
N1  
P5  
U4  
HD5 pin = 1: HPI operates as an HPI32.  
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)  
As PCI data-address bus (PCI_EN pin = 1)  
Used for transfer of data and address  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
§
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
39  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) (CONTINUED)  
§
§
§
HD14/AD14  
HD13/AD13  
HD12/AD12  
U1  
U3  
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI data-address bus (I/O/Z)  
U2  
§
As HPI data bus (PCI_EN pin = 0)  
HD11/AD11  
V4  
V1  
Used for transfer of data, address, and control  
Host-Port bus width (HPI_WIDTH) user-configurable at device reset via a 10-kresistor  
§
HD10/AD10  
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
HD9/AD9  
HD8/AD8  
HD7/AD7  
HD6/AD6  
HD5/AD5  
HD4/AD4  
HD3/AD3  
HD2/AD2  
HD1/AD1  
HD0/AD0  
V3  
pullup/pulldown resistor on the HD5 pin:  
V2  
HD5 pin = 0: HPI operates as an HPI16.  
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are  
reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)  
W2  
W4  
Y1  
I/O/Z  
HD5 pin = 1: HPI operates as an HPI32.  
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)  
Y3  
Y2  
As PCI data-address bus (PCI_EN pin = 1)  
Y4  
Used for transfer of data and address  
AA1  
AA3  
W3  
AD1  
§
PCBE0  
XSP_CS  
I/O/Z  
O
PCI command/byte enable 0 (I/O/Z). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.  
PCI serial interface chip select (O). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.  
IPD  
IPD  
This pin has no function at default [default] or when PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin is the  
PCI serial interface clock (O).  
XSP_CLK  
AC2  
I/O/Z  
This pin has no function at default [default] or when PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin is the  
PCI serial interface data in (I). In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the output data pin of the  
serial PROM.  
XSP_DI  
AB3  
I
IPU  
IPU  
This pin has no function at default [default] or when PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this pin is the  
PCI serial interface data out (O). In PCI mode, this pin is connected to the input data pin of the  
serial PROM.  
XSP_DO  
AA2  
O/Z  
§
GP15/PRST  
G3  
F2  
G4  
J3  
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at default.  
GPIO 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.  
§
GP14/PCLK  
§
GP13/PINTA  
GPIO 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.  
§
GP12/PGNT  
GP11/PREQ  
I/O/Z  
§
F1  
L2  
GPIO 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.  
GPIO 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.  
§
GP10/PCBE3  
§
GP9/PIDSEL  
M3  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
§
These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
40  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
§
EMIF (32-bit) − CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY  
CE3  
CE2  
CE1  
CE0  
BE3  
BE2  
BE1  
BE0  
PDT  
L26  
K23  
K24  
K25  
M25  
M26  
L23  
L24  
M22  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
EMIF memory space enables  
Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address  
Only one pin is asserted during any external data access  
EMIF byte-enable control  
Decoded from the low-order address bits. The number of address bits or byte enables  
used depends on the width of external memory.  
Byte-write enables for most types of memory  
Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)  
EMIF peripheral data transfer, allows direct transfer between external peripherals  
§
EMIF (32-BIT) − BUS ARBITRATION  
HOLDA  
HOLD  
N22  
V23  
P22  
O
I
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
EMIF hold-request-acknowledge to the host  
EMIF hold request from the host  
EMIF bus request output  
BUSREQ  
O
§
EMIF (32-BIT) − ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL  
EMIF external input clock. The EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) is  
selected at reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the ECLKIN_SEL[1:0] pins.  
AECLKIN is the default for the EMIF input clock.  
ECLKIN  
H25  
I
IPD  
EMIF output clock 2. Programmable to be EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6  
clock) frequency divided-by-1, -2, or -4.  
ECLKOUT2  
ECLKOUT1  
J23  
J26  
O/Z  
O/Z  
IPD  
IPD  
EMIF output clock 1 at EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)  
frequency.  
EMIF asynchronous memory read-enable/SDRAM column-address strobe/programmable  
synchronous interface-address strobe or read-enable  
ARE/  
SDCAS/  
SADS/SRE  
For programmable synchronous interface, the RENEN field in the CE Space Secondary  
Control Register (CExSEC) selects between SADS and SRE:  
J25  
J24  
O/Z  
O/Z  
IPU  
IPU  
If RENEN = 0, then the SADS/SRE signal functions as the SADS signal.  
If RENEN = 1, then the SADS/SRE signal functions as the SRE signal.  
AOE/  
SDRAS/  
SOE  
EMIF asynchronous memory output-enable/SDRAM row-address strobe/programmable  
synchronous interface output-enable  
AWE/  
SDWE/  
SWE  
EMIF asynchronous memory write-enable/SDRAM write-enable/programmable  
synchronous interface write-enable  
K26  
L25  
O/Z  
O/Z  
IPU  
IPU  
EMIF SDRAM clock-enable (used for self-refresh mode).  
SDCKE  
If SDRAM is not in system, SDCKE can be used as a general-purpose output.  
SOE3  
ARDY  
R22  
L22  
O/Z  
I
IPU  
IPU  
EMIF synchronous memory output-enable for CE3 (for glueless FIFO interface)  
Asynchronous memory ready input  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
§
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.  
41  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
§
EMIF (32-BIT) − ADDRESS  
EA22  
T22  
V24  
V25  
V26  
U23  
U24  
U25  
U26  
T25  
T26  
R23  
R24  
P23  
P24  
P26  
N23  
N24  
N26  
M23  
M24  
EA21  
EA20  
EA19  
EA18  
EA17  
EA16  
EA15  
EA14  
EA13  
EA12  
EA11  
EA10  
EA9  
EMIF external address (word address)  
Note: EMIF address numbering for the C6411 device starts with EA3 to maintain signal name  
compatibility with other C64xdevices (e.g., C6414, C6415, and C6416) [see the 64-bit EMIF  
addressing scheme in the TMS320C6000 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) Reference  
Guide (literature number SPRU266)].  
O/Z  
IPD  
EA8  
EA7  
EA6  
EA5  
EA4  
EA3  
§
EMIF (32-bit) − DATA  
ED31  
ED30  
ED29  
ED28  
ED27  
ED26  
ED25  
ED24  
ED23  
ED22  
ED21  
ED20  
ED19  
ED18  
ED17  
ED16  
ED15  
ED14  
C26  
D26  
D25  
E25  
E24  
E26  
F24  
F25  
F23  
F26  
G24  
G25  
G23  
G26  
H23  
H24  
C19  
D19  
I/O/Z  
IPU  
EMIF external data  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.  
§
42  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
§
EMIF (32-bit) − DATA (CONTINUED)  
ED13  
A20  
D20  
B20  
C20  
A21  
D21  
B21  
C21  
A22  
C22  
B22  
B23  
A23  
A24  
ED12  
ED11  
ED10  
ED9  
ED8  
ED7  
ED6  
ED5  
ED4  
ED3  
ED2  
ED1  
ED0  
I/O/Z  
IPU  
EMIF external data  
TIMER 2  
Timer 2 or general-purpose output  
Timer 2 or general-purpose input  
TIMER 1  
TOUT2  
TINP2  
A4  
C5  
O/Z  
I
IPD  
IPD  
TOUT1  
TINP1  
B5  
A5  
O/Z  
I
IPD  
IPD  
Timer 1 or general-purpose output  
Timer 1 or general-purpose input  
TIMER 0  
TOUT0  
TINP0  
D6  
C6  
O/Z  
I
IPD  
IPD  
Timer 0 or general-purpose output  
Timer 0 or general-purpose input  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)  
McBSP1 external clock source (as opposed to internal)  
McBSP1 receive clock  
CLKS1  
CLKR1  
CLKX1  
DR1  
AC8  
AC10  
AB12  
AF11  
AB11  
AC9  
I
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I
McBSP1 transmit clock  
McBSP1 receive data  
DX1  
O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
McBSP1 transmit data  
FSR1  
FSX1  
McBSP1 receive frame sync  
AB13  
McBSP1 transmit frame sync  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)  
CLKS0  
CLKR0  
CLKX0  
DR0  
F4  
D1  
E1  
D2  
E2  
C1  
E3  
I
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
McBSP0 external clock source (as opposed to internal)  
McBSP0 receive clock  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I
McBSP0 transmit clock  
McBSP0 receive data  
DX0  
O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
McBSP0 transmit data  
FSR0  
FSX0  
McBSP0 receive frame sync  
McBSP0 transmit frame sync  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.  
§
43  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
RESERVED FOR TEST  
AD11  
AD12  
A16  
D15  
G14  
H7  
For proper device operation, these RSV pins must be externally pulled  
down to ground with a 10-kresistor.  
RSV  
RSV  
For proper device operation, these RSV pins must be externally pulled up to DV  
with a 1-kresistor.  
DD  
IPD  
N20  
P7  
RSV  
Reserved. These pins must be connected directly to CV  
for proper device operation.  
DD  
Y13  
R6  
RSV  
RSV  
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to DV  
for proper device operation.  
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)  
DD  
A3  
A6  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
A7  
A9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A17  
B6  
B7  
B8  
RSV  
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)  
B9  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B15  
B16  
B19  
C7  
C8  
C9  
C10  
C11  
C12  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
44  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)  
NO.  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
D7  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
D8  
D9  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D16  
D17  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
G1  
RSV  
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)  
G2  
H3  
J4  
K6  
N3  
P3  
R25  
R26  
T23  
T24  
W23  
W24  
W25  
Y23  
Y24  
Y25  
Y26  
AA23  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
45  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)  
AA24  
AA25  
AA26  
AB1  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
IPD  
AB2  
AB14  
AB24  
AB25  
AB26  
AC1  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
AC11  
AC12  
AC13  
AC14  
AC19  
AC20  
AC21  
AC25  
AC26  
AD7  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
RSV  
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)  
AD8  
AD9  
AD10  
AD13  
AD14  
AD15  
AD19  
AD20  
AD21  
AD22  
AD26  
AE7  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
AE8  
AE9  
AE10  
AE11  
AE12  
AE15  
AE20  
AE21  
IPU  
IPU  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
46  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
IPD/  
IPU  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)  
NO.  
AE22  
AE23  
AF3  
IPU  
IPU  
IPD  
AF7  
AF9  
AF10  
AF12  
AF13  
AF14  
AF20  
AF21  
AF22  
AF23  
AF24  
RSV  
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
IPU  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kIPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite  
supply rail, a 1-kresistor should be used, unless otherwise noted.)  
47  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢓꢋ  
ꢀꢔ  
ꢓꢒ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS  
NAME  
NO.  
A2  
A25  
B1  
B14  
B26  
E7  
E8  
E10  
E17  
E19  
E20  
F3  
F9  
F12  
F15  
F18  
G5  
G22  
H5  
H22  
J21  
K5  
3.3-V supply voltage  
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)  
DV  
S
DD  
K22  
L5  
M5  
M6  
M21  
N2  
P25  
R5  
R21  
T5  
U5  
U22  
V6  
V21  
W5  
W22  
Y5  
Y22  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
48  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)  
NO.  
AA9  
AA12  
AA15  
AA18  
AB7  
AB8  
AB10  
AB17  
AB19  
AB20  
AE1  
AE13  
AE26  
AF2  
AF25  
A1  
3.3-V supply voltage  
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)  
DV  
DD  
A26  
B2  
B25  
C3  
S
C24  
D4  
D23  
E5  
E22  
F6  
F7  
1.2-V supply voltage  
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)  
CV  
DD  
F20  
F21  
G6  
G7  
G8  
G10  
G11  
G13  
G16  
G17  
G19  
G20  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
49  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)  
NAME  
NO.  
G21  
H20  
K7  
K20  
L7  
L20  
N7  
P20  
T7  
T20  
U7  
U20  
W7  
W20  
Y6  
Y7  
Y8  
Y10  
Y11  
Y14  
Y16  
Y17  
Y19  
Y20  
Y21  
AA6  
AA7  
AA20  
AA21  
AB5  
AB22  
AC4  
AC23  
AD3  
AD24  
AE2  
AE25  
AF1  
AF26  
1.2-V supply voltage  
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)  
CV  
S
DD  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
50  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
GROUND PINS  
A8  
A19  
B3  
B13  
B24  
C2  
C4  
C23  
C25  
D3  
D5  
D22  
D24  
E4  
E6  
E9  
E18  
E21  
E23  
F5  
V
SS  
GND  
Ground pins  
F8  
F10  
F11  
F13  
F14  
F16  
F17  
F19  
F22  
G9  
G12  
G15  
G18  
H1  
H6  
H21  
H26  
J5  
J7  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
51  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢓꢋ  
ꢀꢔ  
ꢓꢒ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)  
NAME  
NO.  
J20  
J22  
K21  
L6  
L21  
M7  
M20  
N6  
N21  
N25  
P2  
P6  
P21  
R7  
R20  
T6  
T21  
U6  
U21  
V5  
V
SS  
GND  
Ground pins  
V7  
V20  
V22  
W1  
W6  
W21  
W26  
Y9  
Y12  
Y15  
Y18  
AA5  
AA8  
AA10  
AA11  
AA13  
AA14  
AA16  
AA17  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
52  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
Terminal Functions (Continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)  
NO.  
AA19  
AA22  
AB4  
AB6  
AB9  
AB18  
AB21  
AB23  
AC3  
AC5  
AC22  
AC24  
AD2  
V
SS  
GND  
Ground pins  
AD4  
AD23  
AD25  
AE3  
AE14  
AE24  
AF8  
AF19  
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground  
53  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
development support  
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000DSP platform, including tools to  
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully  
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.  
The following products support development of C6000DSP-based applications:  
Software Development Tools:  
Code Composer StudioIntegrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor  
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools  
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP BIOS), which provides the basic run-time target software  
needed to support any DSP application.  
Hardware Development Tools:  
Extended Development System (XDS) Emulator (supports C6000DSP multiprocessor system debug)  
EVM (Evaluation Module)  
The TMS320 DSP Development Support Reference Guide (SPRU011) contains information about  
development-support products for all TMS320DSP family member devices, including documentation. See  
this document for further information on TMS320DSP documentation or any TMS320DSP support products  
from Texas Instruments. An additional document, the TMS320 Third-Party Support Reference Guide  
(SPRU052), contains information about TMS320DSP-related products from other companies in the industry.  
To receive TMS320DSP literature, contact the Literature Response Center at 800/477-8924.  
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000DSP platform, visit the Texas  
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For  
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.  
Code Composer Studio, XDS, and TMS320 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
54  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
device support  
device and development-support tool nomenclature  
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all  
TMS320DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320DSP commercial family member has one of three  
prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its  
support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from  
engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).  
Device development evolutionary flow:  
TMX  
TMP  
TMS  
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical  
specifications  
Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed  
quality and reliability verification  
Fully qualified production device  
Support tool development evolutionary flow:  
TMDX  
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification  
testing.  
TMDS  
Fully qualified development-support product  
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:  
“Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes.”  
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability  
of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.  
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production  
devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their  
expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.  
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type  
(for example, GLZ) and the temperature range (for example, blank is the default commercial temperature  
range). Figure 5 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320C6000DSP  
platform member.  
The ZLZ package, like the GLZ package, is a 532-pin plastic BGA only with lead-free balls. The ZLZ package  
type is available upon request. For device part numbers and further ordering information for TMS320C6411 in  
the GLZ and ZLZ package types, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com) or contact your TI sales representative.  
55  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
device and development-support tool nomenclature (continued)  
(
)
TMS 320  
C 6411 GLZ  
PREFIX  
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)  
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature  
TMX= Experimental device  
TMP= Prototype device  
TMS= Qualified device  
PACKAGE TYPE  
GLZ = 532-pin plastic BGA  
ZLZ = 532-pin plastic BGA, with lead free balls  
DEVICE FAMILY  
32 or 320 = TMS320t DSP family  
DEVICE  
C64x DSP:  
6411  
6411A  
TECHNOLOGY  
C = CMOS  
BGA  
=
Ball Grid Array  
For the actual device part number (P/N) and ordering information, see the TI website (www.ti.com).  
Figure 5. TMS320C6411 DSP Device Nomenclature  
For additional information, see the TMS320C6411 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature number  
SPRZ194)  
56  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
documentation support  
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320DSP family generations of devices from product  
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data sheets,  
such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s reference guides for all devices and tools;  
technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line help; and hardware and software applications. The  
following is a brief, descriptive list of support documentation specific to the C6000DSP devices:  
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189) describes the  
C6000DSP CPU (core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated interrupts.  
The TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) provides an  
overview and briefly describes the functionality of the peripherals available on the C6000DSP platform of  
devices. This document also includes a table listing the peripherals available on the C6000 devices along with  
literature numbers and hyperlinks to the associated peripheral documents.  
The TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395) gives an introduction to the C64xdigital  
signal processor, and discusses the application areas that are enhanced by the C64xDSP VelociTI.2VLIW  
architecture.  
The TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors data sheet  
(literature number SPRS146) describes the features of the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and  
TMS320C6416 DSP devices and provides pinouts, electrical specifications, and timings.  
The TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 Digital Signal Processors Silicon Errata (literature  
number SPRZ011) describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for the TMS320C6414,  
TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 DSP devices.  
The TMS320C6411 Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ194) describes the known  
exceptions to the functional specifications for particular silicon revisions of the TMS320C6411 device.  
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839) describes how to  
properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.  
For more detailed information on the device compatibility and similarities/differences among the C6211, C6411,  
C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices, see the How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414,  
TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 DSPs application report (literature number SPRA718) and How To Begin  
Development Today With the TMS320C6411 DSP application report (literature number SPRA374).  
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer StudioIntegrated  
Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000DSP latest documentation, visit the Texas  
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL).  
57  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
clock PLL  
Most of the internal C64xDSP clocks are generated from a single source through the CLKIN pin. This source  
clock either drives the PLL, which multiplies the source clock frequency to generate the internal CPU clock, or  
bypasses the PLL to become the internal CPU clock.  
To use the PLL to generate the CPU clock, the external PLL filter circuit must be properly designed. Figure 6  
shows the external PLL circuitry for either x1 (PLL bypass) or other PLL multiply modes.  
To minimize the clock jitter, a single clean power supply should power both the C64xDSP device and the  
external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input  
clock timing requirements, see the input and output clocks electricals section.  
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock source  
must meet the DSP requirements in this data sheet (see the electrical characteristics over recommended  
ranges of suppy voltage and operating case temperature table and the input and output clocks electricals  
section). Table 23 lists some examples of compatible CLKIN external clock sources:  
Table 23. Compatible CLKIN External Clock Sources  
COMPATIBLE PARTS FOR  
EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES (CLKIN)  
PART NUMBER  
MANUFACTURER  
JITO-2  
STA series, ST4100 series  
SG-636  
Fox Electronix  
SaRonix Corporation  
Epson America  
Oscillators  
342  
Corning Frequency Control  
PLL  
ICS525-02  
Integrated Circuit Systems  
Spread Spectrum Clock Generator  
MK1714  
58  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
clock PLL (continued)  
3.3 V  
CPU Clock  
C1  
C2  
EMI  
/2  
Configuration Bus  
filter  
10 µF 0.1 µF  
/8  
/4  
/6  
Timer Internal Clock  
PLLV  
CLKOUT4,  
McBSP Internal Clock  
CLKMODE0  
(See Table 24)  
CLKOUT6  
PLLMULT  
PLL x6  
00 01 10  
ECLKIN_SEL[1:0]  
CLKIN  
PLLCLK  
1
0
/4  
/2  
ECLKIN  
EK2RATE  
(GBLCTL.[19,18])  
EMIF  
00 01 10  
Internal to C6411  
(For the PLL Options, CLKMODE0 Pin Setup, and  
PLL Clock Frequency Ranges, see Table 24.)  
ECLKOUT1 ECLKOUT2  
NOTES: A. Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C6000DSP device as possible. For the best  
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or  
components other than the ones shown.  
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI  
Filter).  
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DV  
D. EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -223, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.  
.
DD  
Figure 6. External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL Multiply Modes or x1 (Bypass) Mode  
†‡  
Table 24. TMS320C6411 PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges, and Typical Lock Time  
GLZ and ZLZ PACKAGE − 23 x 23 mm BGA  
CLKMODE  
(PLL MULTIPLY  
FACTORS)  
CLKIN  
RANGE  
(MHz)  
CPU CLOCK  
FREQUENCY  
RANGE (MHz)  
TYPICAL  
CLKOUT4  
RANGE (MHz)  
CLKOUT6  
RANGE (MHz)  
CLKMODE0  
LOCK TIME  
§
(µs)  
0
1
Bypass (x1) [default]  
x6  
30−75.75  
30−50.5  
30−75.75  
180−303  
7.5−18.93  
45−75.75  
5−12.62  
30−50.5  
N/A  
75  
These clock frequency range values are applicable to a C6411−300 speed device.  
Use an external pullup resistor on the CLKMODE0 pin to set the C6411 device to the valid PLL multiply clock mode (x6). With an internal pulldown  
resistor on the CLKMODE0 pin, the default clock mode is x1 (bypass).  
Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL lock time may vary by as much as 150% from the specified typical value. For example, if  
the typical lock time is specified as 100 µs, the maximum value may be as long as 250 µs.  
§
59  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
general-purpose input/output (GPIO)  
To use the GP[15:0] software-configurable GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP Enable (GPEN) Register and  
the GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction (GPDIR) Register must be properly configured.  
GPxEN =  
GPxDIR =  
GPxDIR =  
1
0
1
GP[x] pin is enabled  
GP[x] pin is an input  
GP[x] pin is an output  
where “x” represents one of the 15 through 0 GPIO pins  
Figure 7 shows the GPIO enable bits in the GPEN register for the C6411 device. To use any of the GPx pins  
as general-purpose input/output functions, the corresponding GPxEN bit must be set to “1” (enabled). Default  
values are device-specific, so refer to Figure 7 for the C6411 default configuration.  
31  
24 23  
Reserved  
R-0  
16  
15  
GP15 GP14 GP13 GP12 GP11 GP10  
EN EN EN EN EN EN  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP9  
EN  
GP8  
EN  
GP7  
EN  
GP6  
EN  
GP5  
EN  
GP4  
EN  
GP3  
EN  
GP2  
EN  
GP1  
EN  
GP0  
EN  
R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1  
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset  
Figure 7. GPIO Enable Register (GPEN) [Hex Address: 01B0 0000]  
Figure 8 shows the GPIO direction bits in the GPDIR register. This register determines if a given GPIO pin is  
an input or an output providing the corresponding GPxEN bit is enabled (set to “1”) in the GPEN register. By  
default, all the GPIO pins are configured as input pins.  
31  
24 23  
Reserved  
R-0  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
9
8
6
4
3
1
0
10  
7
5
2
GP15 GP14 GP13 GP12 GP11 GP10  
DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR  
GP9  
DIR  
GP8  
DIR  
GP7  
DIR  
GP6  
DIR  
GP5  
DIR  
GP4  
DIR  
GP3  
DIR  
GP2  
DIR  
GP1  
DIR  
GP0  
DIR  
R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0  
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset  
Figure 8. GPIO Direction Register (GPDIR) [Hex Address: 01B0 0004]  
For more detailed information on general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs), see the TMS320C6000 DSP  
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).  
60  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
power-down mode logic  
Figure 9 shows the power-down mode logic on the C6411.  
CLKOUT4  
CLKOUT6  
Internal Clock Tree  
Clock  
Distribution  
and Dividers  
PD1  
PD2  
IFR  
Power-  
Clock  
PLL  
Internal  
Peripherals  
IER  
Down  
Logic  
CSR  
PWRD  
CPU  
PD3  
TMS320C6411  
CLKIN  
RESET  
External input clocks, with the exception of CLKIN, are not gated by the power-down mode logic.  
Figure 9. Power-Down Mode Logic  
triggering, wake-up, and effects  
The power-down modes and their wake-up methods are programmed by setting the PWRD field (bits 15−10)  
of the control status register (CSR). The PWRD field of the CSR is shown in Figure 10 and described in Table 25.  
When writing to the CSR, all bits of the PWRD field should be set at the same time. Logic 0 should be used when  
writing to the reserved bit (bit 15) of the PWRD field. The CSR is discussed in detail in the TMS320C6000 CPU  
and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).  
61  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
31  
16  
8
15  
14  
13  
Enabled  
12  
11  
10  
9
Enable or  
Non-Enabled  
Interrupt Wake  
Reserved  
R/W-0  
PD3  
PD2  
PD1  
Interrupt Wake  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
7
0
Legend: R/W−x = Read/write reset value  
NOTE: The shadowed bits are not part of the power-down logic discussion and therefore are not covered here. For information on these other  
bit fields in the CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).  
Figure 10. PWRD Field of the CSR Register  
A delay of up to nine clock cycles may occur after the instruction that sets the PWRD bits in the CSR before the  
PD mode takes effect. As best practice, NOPs should be padded after the PWRD bits are set in the CSR to account  
for this delay.  
If PD1 mode is terminated by a non-enabled interrupt, the program execution returns to the instruction where  
PD1 took effect. If PD1 mode is terminated by an enabled interrupt, the interrupt service routine will be executed  
first, then the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect. In the case with an enabled  
interrupt, the GIE bit in the CSR and the NMIE bit in the interrupt enable register (IER) must also be set in order  
for the interrupt service routine to execute; otherwise, execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect  
upon PD1 mode termination by an enabled interrupt.  
62  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PD2 and PD3 modes can only be aborted by device reset. Table 25 summarizes all the power-down modes.  
Table 25. Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes  
PRWD FIELD  
(BITS 15−10)  
POWER-DOWN  
MODE  
WAKE-UP METHOD  
EFFECT ON CHIP’S OPERATION  
000000  
No power-down  
PD1  
CPU halted (except for the interrupt logic)  
001001  
Wake by an enabled interrupt  
Power-down mode blocks the internal clock inputs at the  
boundary of the CPU, preventing most of the CPU’s logic from  
switching. During PD1, EDMA transactions can proceed  
between peripherals and internal memory.  
Wake by an enabled or  
non-enabled interrupt  
010001  
PD1  
Output clock from PLL is halted, stopping the internal clock  
structure from switching and resulting in the entire chip being  
halted. All register and internal RAM contents are preserved. All  
functional I/O “freeze” in the last state when the PLL clock is  
turned off.  
PD2  
011010  
Wake by a device reset  
Input clock to the PLL stops generating clocks. All register and  
internal RAM contents are preserved. All functional I/O “freeze” in  
the last state when the PLL clock is turned off. Following reset, the  
PLL needs time to re-lock, just as it does following power-up.  
Wake-up from PD3 takes longer than wake-up from PD2 because  
the PLL needs to be re-locked, just as it does following power-up.  
PD3  
011100  
Wake by a device reset  
All others  
Reserved  
When entering PD2 and PD3, all functional I/O remains in the previous state. However, for peripherals which are asynchronous in nature or  
peripherals with an external clock source, output signals may transition in response to stimulus on the inputs. Under these conditions,  
peripherals will not operate according to specifications.  
C64x power-down mode with an emulator  
If user power-down modes are programmed, and an emulator is attached, the modes will be masked to allow  
the emulator access to the system. This condition prevails until the emulator is reset or the cable is removed  
from the header. If power measurements are to be performed when in a power-down mode, the emulator cable  
should be removed.  
When the DSP is in power-down mode PD2 or PD3, emulation logic will force any emulation execution  
command (such as Step or Run) to spin in IDLE. For this reason, PC writes (such as loading code) will fail. A DSP  
reset will be required to get the DSP out of PD2/PD3.  
power-supply sequencing  
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply. However,  
systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended periods of time  
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.  
power-supply design considerations  
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between core and I/O  
power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see Figure 11).  
63  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
I/O Supply  
DV  
CV  
DD  
DD  
Schottky  
Diode  
C6000  
DSP  
Core Supply  
V
SS  
GND  
Figure 11. Schottky Diode Diagram  
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize  
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance  
applications utilizing the C6000platform of DSPs, the PC board should include separate power planes for  
core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.  
power-supply decoupling  
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as possible  
close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps, 30 for the core supply  
and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close to the DSP power pins, no more than 1.25 cm maximum  
distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better because of their lower parasitic  
inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass caps (near 560 pF) should be closest  
to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 pF or as large as can be obtained in a small package) should be  
next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and 8 medium caps per supply (32 total) be placed  
immediately next to the BGA vias, using the “interior” BGA space and at least the corners of the “exterior”.  
Eight larger caps (4 for each supply) can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the  
order of 100 µF) should be furthest away (but still as close as possible). No less than 4 large caps per supply  
(8 total) should be placed outside of the BGA.  
Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of any  
component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be considered.  
64  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement  
The TMS320C6411 DSP requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly  
initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP’s emulation logic. Both resets are  
required for proper operation.  
Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by TCLK; otherwise, BSCAN may not respond as expected  
after TRST is asserted.  
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for the  
DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG port interface  
and DSP’s emulation logic in the reset state. TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG  
controller to debug the DSP or exercise the DSP’s boundary scan functionality. RESET must be released in  
order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions  
work correctly independent of current state of RESET.  
For maximum reliability, the TMS320C6411 DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure  
that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the DSP’s internal emulation logic will always be properly  
initialized. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG  
controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST. When using this type of  
JTAG controller, assert TRST to intialize the DSP after powerup and externally drive TRST high before  
attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.  
Following the release of RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must occur to latch the state of EMU1 and  
EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Normal/Emulation mode. For  
more detailed information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.  
Note: The DESIGN_WARNING section of the TMS320C6411 BSDL file contains information and constraints  
regarding proper device operation while in Boundary Scan Mode.  
EMIF device speed  
The rated EMIF speed of this device only applies to the SDRAM interface when in a system that meets the  
following requirements:  
1 chip-enable (CE) space (maximum of 2 chips) of SDRAM connected to EMIF  
up to 1 CE space of buffers connected to EMIF  
EMIF trace lengths between 1 and 3 inches  
143-MHz SDRAM for 75-MHz operation  
Other configurations may be possible, but timing analysis must be done to verify all AC timings are met.  
Verification of AC timings is mandatory when using configurations other than those specified above.  
TI recommends utilizing the input/output buffer information specification (IBIS) models to analyze all AC timings.  
To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models  
for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).  
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines (see  
the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).  
65  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
bootmode  
The C6411 device resets using the active-low signal RESET. While RESET is low, the device is held in reset  
and is initialized to the prescribed reset state. Refer to reset timing for reset timing characteristics and states  
of device pins during reset. The release of RESET starts the processor running with the prescribed device  
configuration and boot mode.  
The C6411 has three types of boot modes:  
D
Host boot  
If host boot is selected, upon release of RESET, the CPU is internally “stalled” while the remainder of the  
device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU’s memory space as necessary  
through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that control the EMIF or  
other peripherals. For the C6411 device, the HPI peripheral is used for host boot if PCI_EN = 0, and the PCI  
peripheral is used if PCI_EN = 1. Once the host is finished with all necessary initialization, it must set the  
DSPINT bit in the HPIC register to complete the boot process. This transition causes the boot configuration  
logic to bring the CPU out of the “stalled” state. The CPU then begins execution from address 0. The DSPINT  
condition is not latched by the CPU, because it occurs while the CPU is still internally “stalled”. Also, DSPINT  
brings the CPU out of the “stalled” state only if the host boot process is selected. All memory may be written  
to and read by the host. This allows for the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if required. After the CPU is  
out of the “stalled” state, the CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more DSPINTs can be received.  
D
D
EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)  
Upon the release of RESET, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to address 0  
by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally “stalled”. The data should be stored  
in the endian format that the system is using. In this case, the EMIF automatically assembles consecutive  
8-bit bytes to form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is automatically done by the EDMA  
as a single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After completion of the block transfer, the CPU  
is released from the “stalled” state and starts running from address 0.  
No boot  
With no boot, the CPU begins direct execution from the memory located at address 0. Note: operation is  
undefined if invalid code is located at address 0.  
reset  
A hardware reset (RESET) is required to place the DSP into a known good state out of power-up. The RESET  
signal can be asserted (pulled low) prior to ramping the core and I/O voltages or after the core and I/O voltages  
have reached their proper operating conditions. As a best practice, reset should be held low during power-up.  
Prior to deasserting RESET (low-to-high transition), the core and I/O voltages should be at their proper  
operating conditions and CLKIN should also be running at the correct frequency.  
66  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
absolute maximum ratings over operating case temperature range (unless otherwise noted)  
Supply voltage ranges: CV  
DV  
Input voltage ranges: (except PCI), V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V  
(PCI), V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.5 V to DV  
Output voltage ranges: (except PCI), V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V  
(see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 1.8 V  
(see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V  
DD  
DD  
I
+ 0.5 V  
IP  
DD  
O
(PCI), V  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.5 V to DV  
+ 0.5 V  
OP  
DD  
Operating case temperature range, T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0_C to 90_C  
C
Storage temperature range, T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65_C to 150_C  
stg  
Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and  
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
NOTE 1: All voltage values are with respect to V  
SS  
.
recommended operating conditions  
MIN  
1.14  
3.14  
0
NOM  
1.2  
3.3  
0
MAX  
1.26  
3.46  
0
UNIT  
V
CV  
DV  
Supply voltage, Core  
Supply voltage, I/O  
Supply ground  
DD  
DD  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
T
V
SS  
High-level input voltage (except PCI)  
Low-level input voltage (except PCI)  
Input voltage (PCI)  
2
V
IH  
0.8  
V
IL  
−0.5  
DV  
DV  
+ 0.5  
V
IP  
DD  
DD  
High-level input voltage (PCI)  
Low-level input voltage (PCI)  
0.5DV  
DD  
+ 0.5  
V
IHP  
ILP  
OS  
−0.5  
0.3DV  
DD  
V
§
−1.0  
§
4.3  
Maximum voltage during overshoot/undershoot  
Operating case temperature  
V
0
90  
_C  
C
Future variants of the C6411 DSP may operate at voltages ranging from 0.9 V to 1.4 V to provide a range of system power/performance options.  
TI highly recommends that users design-in a supply that can handle multiple voltages within this range (i.e., 1.2 V, 1.25 V, 1.3 V, 1.35 V, 1.4 V  
with 3% tolerances) by implementing simple board changes such as reference resistor values or input pin configuration modifications. Examples  
of such supplies include the PT4660, PT5500, PT5520, PT6440, and PT6930 series from Power Trends, a subsidiary of Texas Instruments. Not  
incorporating a flexible supply may limit the system’s ability to easily adapt to future versions of C641x devices.  
§
The absolute maximum ratings should not be exceeded for more than 30% of the cycle period.  
67  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case  
temperature (unless otherwise noted)  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNIT  
V
V
V
V
High-level output voltage (except PCI)  
High-level output voltage (PCI)  
Low-level output voltage (except PCI)  
Low-level output voltage (PCI)  
DV  
= MIN, = MAX  
I
2.4  
V
V
V
V
OH  
DD  
= −0.5 mA,  
OH  
DV  
I
= 3.3 V  
0.9DV  
DD  
OHP  
OL  
OHP  
DV  
DD  
= MAX  
= MIN,  
DD  
= 1.5 mA,  
I
0.4  
OL  
DV  
I
= 3.3 V  
0.1DV  
DD  
OLP  
OLP  
DD  
V = V  
SS  
to DV  
no opposing internal  
opposing internal  
opposing internal  
I
DD  
DD  
DD  
10  
uA  
uA  
uA  
resistor  
V = V  
SS  
to DV  
I
50  
100  
150  
I
I
Input current (except PCI)  
pullup resistor  
V = V to DV  
I
SS  
−150  
−100  
−50  
10  
pulldown resistor  
§
I
I
Input leakage current (PCI)  
0 < V < DV  
,
DV  
DD  
= 3.3 V  
uA  
IP  
IP DD  
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx  
−16  
mA  
Timer, TDO, GPIO  
(Excluding GP[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP  
−8  
mA  
High-level output current  
OH  
§¶  
16  
PCI/HPI  
−0.5  
mA  
mA  
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx  
Timer, TDO, GPIO  
(Excluding GP[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP  
8
mA  
I
Low-level output current  
Off-state output current  
OL  
1.5  
PCI/HPI  
mA  
uA  
mA  
mA  
pF  
I
I
I
V = DV  
O DD  
or 0 V  
10  
OZ  
#
Core supply current  
CV  
DV  
= 1.2 V, CPU clock = 300 MHz  
= 3.3 V, CPU clock = 300 MHz  
550  
125  
CDD  
DDD  
DD  
DD  
#
I/O supply current  
Input capacitance  
C
C
10  
10  
i
Output capacitance  
pF  
o
§
For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.  
Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.  
PCI input leakage currents include Hi-Z output leakage for all bidirectional buffers with 3-state outputs.  
These rated numbers are from the PCI specification version 2.3. The DC specification and AC specification are defined in Tables 4-3 and 4-4,  
respectively.  
#
Measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power). The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core  
and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320C6411 Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA373).  
recommended clock and control signal transition behavior  
All clocks and control signals must transition between V and V (or between V and V ) in a monotonic  
IH  
IL  
IL  
IH  
manner.  
68  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION  
Tester Pin Electronics  
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point  
42 W  
3.5 nH  
Output  
Under  
Test  
Transmission Line  
Z0 = 50 W  
(see note)  
Device Pin  
(see note)  
4.0 pF  
1.85 pF  
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects  
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.  
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from  
the data sheet timings.  
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.  
Figure 12. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements  
The tester load circuit is for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This load does not indicate  
the maximum load the device is capable of driving.  
signal transition levels  
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both “0” and “1” logic levels.  
V
ref  
= 1.5 V  
Figure 13. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements  
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to V MAX and V MIN for input clocks, V MAX  
IL  
IH  
OL  
OHP  
and V  
PCI output clocks.  
MIN for output clocks, V  
MAX and V  
MIN for PCI input clocks, and V  
MAX and V  
MIN for  
OH  
ILP  
IHP  
OLP  
V
ref  
= V MIN (or V  
IH OH  
MIN or  
MIN)  
V
MIN or V  
IHP  
OHP  
V
ref  
= V MAX (or V  
IL OL  
MAX or  
MAX)  
V
MAX or V  
ILP  
OLP  
Figure 14. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels  
signal transition rates  
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).  
69  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)  
timing parameters and board routing analysis  
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a good  
board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be adjusted by  
increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer information specification  
(IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate  
timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature  
number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing  
differences.  
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the external device and  
from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively impact the input setup time margin,  
but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see Table 26 and Figure 15).  
Figure 15 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure also represents  
board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external device.  
Table 26. Board-Level Timings Example (see Figure 15)  
NO.  
1
DESCRIPTION  
Clock route delay  
2
Minimum DSP hold time  
3
Minimum DSP setup time  
External device hold time requirement  
External device setup time requirement  
Control signal route delay  
External device hold time  
4
5
6
7
8
External device access time  
DSP hold time requirement  
DSP setup time requirement  
Data route delay  
9
10  
11  
ECLKOUT  
(Output from DSP)  
1
ECLKOUT  
(Input to External Device)  
2
3
Control Signals  
(Output from DSP)  
4
5
6
Control Signals  
(Input to External Device)  
7
8
Data Signals  
(Output from External Device)  
9
10  
11  
Data Signals  
(Input to DSP)  
† Control signals include data for Writes.  
‡ Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.  
Figure 15. Board-Level Input/Output Timings  
70  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS  
†‡§  
timing requirements for CLKIN  
(see Figure 16)  
−300  
PLL MODE x6  
x1 (BYPASS)  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
20  
MAX  
MIN  
13.3  
MAX  
1
2
3
4
5
t
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKIN  
33.3  
33.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
c(CLKIN)  
w(CLKINH)  
w(CLKINL)  
t(CLKIN)  
Pulse duration, CLKIN high  
Pulse duration, CLKIN low  
Transition time, CLKIN  
Period jitter, CLKIN  
0.4C  
0.4C  
0.45C  
0.45C  
5
1
0.02C  
0.02C  
J(CLKIN)  
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.  
For more details on the PLL multiplier factor (x6), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.  
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.  
IL  
IH  
1
5
4
2
CLKIN  
3
4
Figure 16. CLKIN Timing  
71  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)  
†‡§  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT4  
(see Figure 17)  
−300  
CLKMODE = x1, x6  
MIN MAX  
175  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Period jitter, CLKOUT4  
0
ps  
ns  
ns  
ns  
J(CKO4)  
w(CKO4H)  
w(CKO4L)  
t(CKO4)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 high  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 low  
Transition time, CLKOUT4  
2P − 0.7  
2P − 0.7  
2P + 0.7  
2P + 0.7  
1
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V  
OL  
PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)  
MAX and V MIN.  
OH  
1
4
2
CLKOUT4  
3
4
Figure 17. CLKOUT4 Timing  
†‡§  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT6  
(see Figure 18)  
−300  
CLKMODE = x1, x6  
MIN MAX  
175  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Period jitter, CLKOUT6  
0
ps  
ns  
ns  
ns  
J(CKO6)  
w(CKO6H)  
w(CKO6L)  
t(CKO6)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 high  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 low  
Transition time, CLKOUT6  
3P − 0.7  
3P − 0.7  
3P + 0.7  
3P + 0.7  
1
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V  
OL  
MAX and V MIN.  
OH  
PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)  
1
4
2
CLKOUT6  
3
4
Figure 18. CLKOUT6 Timing  
72  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)  
†‡§  
timing requirements for ECLKIN  
(see Figure 19)  
−300  
MIN  
NO.  
UNIT  
MAX  
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, ECLKIN  
7.5  
16P  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
c(EKI)  
Pulse duration, ECLKIN high  
Pulse duration, ECLKIN low  
Transition time, ECLKIN  
3.38  
3.38  
w(EKIH)  
w(EKIL)  
t(EKI)  
2
5
t
Period jitter, ECLKIN  
0.02E  
ns  
J(EKI)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.  
IL IH  
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.  
Minimum ECLKIN times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum useable speed of the EMIF may be lower due to AC timing requirements.  
On the -300 device, 75-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met. Minimum ECLKIN cycle times  
must be met, even when ECLKIN is generated by an internal clock source.  
1
5
4
2
ECLKIN  
3
4
Figure 19. ECLKIN Timing  
§#||  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUT1  
(see Figure 20)  
−300  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
Period jitter, ECLKOUT1  
UNIT  
MAX  
k
1
2
3
4
5
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
175  
ps  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
J(EKO1)  
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT1 high  
EH − 0.7 EH + 0.7  
EL − 0.7 EL + 0.7  
1
w(EKO1H)  
w(EKO1L)  
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT1 low  
Transition time, ECLKOUT1  
t(EKO1)  
Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT1 high  
Delay time, ECLKIN low to ECLKOUT1 low  
1
1
8
8
d(EKIH-EKO1H)  
d(EKIL-EKO1L)  
§
#
||  
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns.  
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V  
MIN.  
EH is the high period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns and EL is the low period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns.  
OL OH  
kThis cycle-to-cycle jitter specification was measured with CPU/4 or CPU/6 as the source of the EMIF input clock.  
ECLKIN  
1
6
3
4
4
5
2
ECLKOUT1  
Figure 20. ECLKOUT1 Timing  
73  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUT2  
(see Figure 21)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
Period jitter, ECLKOUT2  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
§
1
2
3
4
5
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
175  
ps  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
J(EKO2)  
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT2 high  
0.5NE − 0.7  
0.5NE − 0.7  
0.5NE + 0.7  
w(EKO2H)  
w(EKO2L)  
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT2 low  
0.5NE + 0.7  
Transition time, ECLKOUT2  
1
8
8
t(EKO2)  
Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT2 high  
Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT2 low  
1
1
d(EKIH-EKO2H)  
d(EKIH-EKO2L)  
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V  
OL  
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns.  
N = the EMIF input clock divider; N = 1, 2, or 4.  
MAX and V MIN.  
OH  
§
This cycle-to-cycle jitter specification was measured with CPU/4 or CPU/6 as the source of the EMIF input clock.  
5
6
ECLKIN  
1
3
4
4
2
ECLKOUT2  
Figure 21. ECLKOUT2 Timing  
74  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING  
†‡  
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles (see Figure 22 and Figure 23)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
6.5  
1
MAX  
3
4
6
t
t
t
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high  
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
su(EDV-AREH)  
h(AREH-EDV)  
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUTx high  
3
su(ARDY-EKO1H)  
Rev 1.1  
Rev 2.0  
1
7
t
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUTx high  
h(EKO1H-ARDY)  
1.3  
To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is only recognized  
two cycles before the end of the programmed strobe time and while ARDY is low, the strobe time is extended cycle-by-cycle. When ARDY is  
recognized low, the end of the strobe time is two cycles after ARDY is recognized high. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width  
of the ARDY signal should be wide enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.  
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are  
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory  
‡§¶  
cycles  
(see Figure 22 and Figure 23)  
−300  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MAX  
7
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low  
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to ARE vaild  
RS * E − 1.5  
RS * E − 1.9  
1
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
osu(SELV-AREL)  
oh(AREH-SELIV)  
d(EKO1H-AREV)  
osu(SELV-AWEL)  
oh(AWEH-SELIV)  
d(EKO1H-AWEV)  
5
8
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low  
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to AWE vaild  
WS * E − 1.7  
WH * E − 1.8  
1.3  
9
10  
7.1  
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are  
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.  
§
E = ECLKOUT1 period in ns  
Select signals for EMIF include: CEx, BE[3:0], EA[22:3], AOE; and for EMIF writes, include ED[31:0].  
75  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)  
Setup = 2  
Strobe = 3  
Not Ready  
Hold = 2  
ECLKOUTx  
CEx  
2
2
1
1
1
BE[3:0]  
BE  
2
EA[22:3]  
Address  
3
4
2
ED[31:0]  
1
5
Read Data  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
5
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
7
7
6
6
ARDY  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,  
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.  
Figure 22. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing  
76  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)  
Setup = 2  
Hold = 2  
Strobe = 3  
Not Ready  
ECLKOUTx  
CEx  
9
9
8
8
8
8
BE[3:0]  
BE  
9
9
EA[22:3]  
ED[31:0]  
Address  
Write Data  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
10  
10  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
7
7
6
6
ARDY  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,  
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.  
Figure 23. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing  
77  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING  
timing requirements for programmable synchronous interface cycles (see Figure 24)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
6
7
t
t
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high  
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high  
6.4  
1.5  
ns  
ns  
su(EDV-EKOxH)  
h(EKOxH-EDV)  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for programmable  
synchronous interface cycles (see Figure 24−Figure 26)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
9.7  
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SADS/SRE valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to, SOE valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SWE valid  
1.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(EKOxH-CEV)  
d(EKOxH-BEV)  
d(EKOxH-BEIV)  
d(EKOxH-EAV)  
d(EKOxH-EAIV)  
d(EKOxH-ADSV)  
d(EKOxH-OEV)  
d(EKOxH-EDV)  
d(EKOxH-EDIV)  
d(EKOxH-WEV)  
9.7  
3
1.3  
4
9.7  
5
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
8
9.7  
9.7  
9.7  
9
10  
11  
12  
1.3  
1.3  
9.7  
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):  
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency  
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency  
CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued  
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).  
Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles  
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).  
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2  
78  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)  
READ latency = 2  
ECLKOUTx  
1
2
1
3
5
CEx  
BE1  
BE2  
BE3  
EA3  
BE4  
BE[3:0]  
4
EA[22:3]  
ED[31:0]  
EA1  
8
EA2  
EA4  
7
6
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
8
9
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
9
§
§
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
The read latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCRL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIF CE Space  
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCRL = 2 and CEEXT = 0.  
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):  
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency  
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency  
CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued  
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).  
Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles  
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).  
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2  
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during  
programmable synchronous interface accesses.  
†‡  
Figure 24. Programmable Synchronous Interface Read Timing (With Read Latency = 2)  
79  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
3
CEx  
2
BE[3:0]  
EA[22:3]  
ED[31:0]  
BE1  
BE2  
EA2  
Q2  
BE3  
EA3  
Q3  
BE4  
EA4  
Q4  
5
4
EA1  
10  
Q1  
10  
11  
8
8
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
§
12  
12  
§
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
The write latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIF CE Space  
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 0 and CEEXT = 0.  
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):  
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency  
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency  
CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued  
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).  
Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles  
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).  
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2  
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during  
programmable synchronous interface accesses.  
†‡  
Figure 25. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing (With Write Latency = 0)  
80  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)  
Write  
Latency =  
1
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
3
CEx  
2
BE[3:0]  
BE1  
BE2  
EA2  
BE3  
EA3  
Q2  
BE4  
EA4  
Q3  
5
4
EA[22:3]  
ED[31:0]  
EA1  
10  
10  
11  
8
Q1  
Q4  
8
§
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
12  
12  
§
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
The write latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIF CE Space  
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 1 and CEEXT = 0.  
The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):  
Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency  
Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency  
CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued  
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).  
Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles  
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).  
Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2  
§
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during  
programmable synchronous interface accesses.  
†‡  
Figure 26. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing (With Write Latency = 1)  
81  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING  
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles (see Figure 27)  
−300  
MIN MAX  
5.4  
NO.  
UNIT  
6
7
t
t
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high  
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high  
ns  
ns  
su(EDV-EKO1H)  
2.5  
h(EKO1H-EDV)  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM cycles  
(see Figure 27−Figure 34)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
9.7  
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDCAS valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDWE valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDRAS valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDCKE valid  
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to PDT valid  
1.3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(EKO1H-CEV)  
d(EKO1H-BEV)  
d(EKO1H-BEIV)  
d(EKO1H-EAV)  
d(EKO1H-EAIV)  
d(EKO1H-CASV)  
d(EKO1H-EDV)  
d(EKO1H-EDIV)  
d(EKO1H-WEV)  
d(EKO1H-RAS)  
d(EKO1H-SDCKEV)  
d(EKO1H-PDTV)  
9.7  
3
1.3  
4
9.7  
5
1.3  
1.3  
8
9.7  
9.7  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
9.7  
9.7  
9.7  
9.7  
82  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
READ  
ECLKOUTx  
CEx  
1
1
2
3
BE[3:0]  
BE1  
BE2  
BE3  
BE4  
4
5
5
5
Bank  
EA[22:14]  
EA[12:3]  
4
Column  
4
EA13  
6
7
D2  
ED[31:0]  
D1  
D3  
D4  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
PDTR/W  
14  
14  
PDT  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTS bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT read, data  
is not latched into EMIF. The PDTRL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data  
phase of a read transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a read can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTRL to 00, 01, 10, or 11,  
respectively. PDTRL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 27.  
Figure 27. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3)  
83  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
WRITE  
ECLKOUTx  
CEx  
1
2
4
4
4
9
2
4
5
5
5
9
3
BE[3:0]  
BE1  
Bank  
BE2  
BE3  
BE4  
EA[22:14]  
Column  
EA[12:3]  
EA13  
10  
ED[31:0]  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
11  
11  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
PDTR/W  
14  
14  
PDT  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTD bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT write, data  
is not driven (in High-Z). The PDTWL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data  
phase of a write transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a write transaction can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTWL to 00,  
01, 10, or 11, respectively. PDTWL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 28.  
Figure 28. SDRAM Write Command  
84  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
ACTV  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
4
5
5
5
Bank Activate  
EA[22:14]  
EA[12:3]  
4
Row Address  
4
Row Address  
EA13  
ED[31:0]  
12  
12  
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS  
AWE/SDWE/SSWE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 29. SDRAM ACTV Command  
DCAB  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
EA[22:14, 12:3]  
4
12  
11  
5
12  
11  
EA13  
ED[31:0]  
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS  
AWE/SDWE/SSWE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 30. SDRAM DCAB Command  
85  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
DEAC  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
4
5
EA[22:14]  
EA[12:3]  
Bank  
4
5
EA13  
ED[31:0]  
12  
11  
12  
11  
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS  
AWE/SDWE/SSWE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 31. SDRAM DEAC Command  
REFR  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
EA[22:14, 12:3]  
EA13  
ED[31:0]  
12  
8
12  
8
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS  
AWE/SDWE/SSWE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 32. SDRAM REFR Command  
86  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
MRS  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
5
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
4
EA[22:3]  
ED[31:0]  
MRS value  
12  
8
12  
8
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS  
11  
11  
AWE/SDWE/SSWE  
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 33. SDRAM MRS Command  
87  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)  
TRAS cycles  
End Self-Refresh  
Self Refresh  
ECLKOUTx  
CEx  
BE[3:0]  
EA[22:14, 12:3]  
EA13  
ED[31:0]  
AOE/SDRAS/SOE  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE  
AWE/SDWE/SWE  
13  
13  
SDCKE  
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM  
accesses.  
Figure 34. SDRAM Self-Refresh Timing  
88  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOLD/HOLDA TIMING  
timing requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles (see Figure 35)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
3
t
Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low  
E
ns  
h(HOLDAL-HOLDL)  
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA  
†‡§  
cycles  
(see Figure 35)  
−300  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MAX  
1
2
4
5
6
7
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIF Bus high impedance  
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low  
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance  
Delay time, EMIF Bus low impedance to HOLDA high  
Delay time, HOLD low to ECLKOUTx high impedance  
Delay time, HOLD high to ECLKOUTx low impedance  
2E  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(HOLDL-EMHZ)  
2E  
7E  
d(EMHZ-HOLDAL)  
d(HOLDH-EMLZ)  
d(EMLZ-HOLDAH)  
d(HOLDL-EKOHZ)  
d(HOLDH-EKOLZ)  
2E  
0
2E  
2E  
2E  
7E  
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns.  
EMIF Bus consists of: CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[22:3], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE , SDCKE,  
SOE3, and PDT.  
§
The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0,  
ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 35.  
All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the minimum delay  
time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.  
External Requestor  
DSP Owns Bus  
DSP Owns Bus  
Owns Bus  
3
HOLD  
2
5
HOLDA  
1
4
7
EMIF Bus  
C6411  
C6411  
ECLKOUTx  
(EKxHZ = 0)  
6
ECLKOUTx  
(EKxHZ = 1)  
EMIF Bus consists of: CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[22:3], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE, SDCKE,  
SOE3, and PDT.  
The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0,  
ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 35.  
Figure 35. HOLD/HOLDA Timing  
89  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
BUSREQ TIMING  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the BUSREQ cycles  
(see Figure 36)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
t
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BUSREQ valid  
0.6  
7.1  
ns  
d(EKO1H-BUSRV)  
ECLKOUTx  
1
1
BUSREQ  
Figure 36. BUSREQ Timing  
90  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
RESET TIMING  
timing requirements for reset (see Figure 37)  
−300  
UNIT  
NO.  
MIN  
10P  
250  
MAX  
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL stable)  
ns  
µs  
ns  
ns  
1
t
w(RST)  
§
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL needs to sync up)  
#
4E or 4C  
16  
17  
18  
t
t
Setup time, boot configuration bits valid before RESET high  
su(boot)  
Hold time, boot configuration bits valid after RESET high  
||  
4P  
h(boot)  
t
Setup time, PCLK active before RESET high  
32N  
ns  
su(PCLK-RSTH)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
This parameter applies to CLKMODE x1 when CLKIN is stable, and applies to CLKMODE x6 when CLKIN and PLL are stable.  
This parameter applies to CLKMODE x6 only (it does not apply to CLKMODE x1). The RESET signal is not connected internally to the clock PLL  
circuit. The PLL, however, may need up to 250 µs to stabilize following device power up or after PLL configuration has been changed. During  
that time, RESET must be asserted to ensure proper device operation. See the clock PLL section for PLL lock times.  
LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], EEAI, and HD5/AD5 are the boot configuration pins during device reset.  
E = 1/AECLKIN clock frequency in ns. C = 1/CLKIN clock frequency in ns. Select whichever value is larger for the MIN parameter.  
N = the PCI input clock (PCLK) period in ns. When PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this parameter must be met.  
#
||  
kh  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during reset  
(see Figure 37)  
−300  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MAX  
2
3
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKIN synchronized internally  
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKIN synchronized internally  
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT1 high impedance  
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKOUT1 valid  
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z high impedance  
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF Z valid  
2E  
2E  
2E  
3P + 20E  
8P + 20E  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(RSTL-ECKI)  
d(RSTH-ECKI)  
4
d(RSTL-ECKO1HZ)  
d(RSTH-ECKO1V)  
d(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)  
d(RSTH-EMIFZV)  
d(RSTL-EMIFHIV)  
d(RSTH-EMIFHV)  
d(RSTL-EMIFLIV)  
d(RSTH-EMIFLV)  
d(RSTL-LOWIV)  
d(RSTH-LOWV)  
d(RSTL-ZHZ)  
5
8P + 20E  
3P + 4E  
6
2E  
16E  
2E  
7
8P + 20E  
8
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF high group invalid  
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF high group valid  
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group invalid  
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF low group valid  
Delay time, RESET low to low group invalid  
9
8P + 20E  
8P + 20E  
11P  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
2E  
0
Delay time, RESET high to low group valid  
Delay time, RESET low to Z group high impedance  
Delay time, RESET high to Z group valid  
0
2P  
8P  
d(RSTH-ZV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
kE = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns.  
hEMIF Z group consists of:  
EA[22:3], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE,  
SOE3, SDCKE, and PDT.  
EMIF high group consists of: HOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)  
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ; HOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)  
Low group consists of:  
XSP_CS, XSP_CLK, and XSP_DO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM (EEAI) is enabled  
(with PCI_EN = 1). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK and XSP_DO pins are in the Z group. For more details  
on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0], CLKX0, CLKX1, XSP_CLK, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, XSP_DO, CLKR0, CLKR1,  
FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1, GP[8:0], GP10/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0,  
GP13/PINTA, GP11/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR,  
HCNTL0/PSTOP, HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, and HINT/PFRAME.  
Z group consists of:  
91  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
RESET TIMING (CONTINUED)  
CLKOUT4  
CLKOUT6  
1
RESET  
PCLK  
18  
2
4
3
5
ECLKIN  
ECLKOUT1  
ECLKOUT2  
6
7
‡§  
EMIF Z Group  
EMIF High Group  
EMIF Low Group  
9
8
11  
13  
10  
12  
Low Group  
14  
15  
‡§  
Z Group  
Boot and Device  
16  
17  
§¶  
Configuration Inputs  
EMIF Z group consists of:  
EA[22:3], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE,  
SOE3, SDCKE, and PDT.  
EMIF high group consists of: HOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)  
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ; HOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)  
Low group consists of:  
XSP_CS, XSP_CLK, and XSP_DO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM (EEAI) is enabled  
(with PCI_EN = 1). Otherwise, the XSP_CLK and XSP_DO pins are in the Z group. For more details  
on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.  
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0], CLKX0, CLKX1, XSP_CLK, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, XSP_DO, CLKR0, CLKR1,  
FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, TOUT1, GP[8:0], GP10/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0,  
GP13/PINTA, GP11/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR,  
HCNTL0/PSTOP, HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, and HINT/PFRAME.  
Z group consists of:  
§
If LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], EEAI, and HD5/AD5 pins are actively driven, care must be taken to ensure no timing contention  
between parameters 6, 7, 14, 15, 16, and 17.  
Boot and Device Configurations Inputs (during reset) include: LEND, BOOTMODE[1:0], ECLKIN_SEL[1:0], EEAI, and HD5/AD5.  
The PCI_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.  
Figure 37. Reset Timing  
92  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING  
timing requirements for external interrupts (see Figure 38)  
−300  
UNIT  
NO.  
MIN  
4P  
8P  
4P  
8P  
MAX  
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse low  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1
2
t
t
w(ILOW)  
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse low  
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse high  
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse high  
w(IHIGH)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
2
1
EXT_INTx/GPx, NMI  
Figure 38. External/NMI Interrupt Timing  
93  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING  
†‡  
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles (see Figure 39 through Figure 46)  
−300  
MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
5
§
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Setup time, select signals valid before HSTROBE low  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
su(SELV-HSTBL)  
h(HSTBL-SELV)  
w(HSTBL)  
§
Hold time, select signals valid after HSTROBE low  
2.4  
4P  
3
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low  
4
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses  
4P  
5
w(HSTBH)  
§
Setup time, select signals valid before HAS low  
10  
11  
12  
13  
su(SELV-HASL)  
h(HASL-SELV)  
su(HDV-HSTBH)  
h(HSTBH-HDV)  
§
Hold time, select signals valid after HAS low  
2
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high  
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high  
5
2.8  
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be  
inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete  
properly.  
14  
t
2
ns  
h(HRDYL-HSTBL)  
18  
19  
t
t
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low  
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low  
2
ns  
ns  
su(HASL-HSTBL)  
2.1  
h(HSTBL-HASL)  
§
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0] and HR/W. For HPI16 mode only, select signals also include HHWIL.  
Select the parameter value of 4P or 12.5 ns, whichever is greater.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface  
†‡  
cycles (see Figure 39 through Figure 46)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
1.3  
2
MAX  
#
6
7
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high  
4P+8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(HSTBL-HRDYH)  
d(HSTBL-HDLZ)  
d(HDV-HRDYL)  
oh(HSTBH-HDV)  
d(HSTBH-HDHZ)  
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read  
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low  
8
−3  
9
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high  
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance  
1.5  
15  
12  
16  
t
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 mode, 2nd half-word only)  
4P+8  
ns  
d(HSTBL-HDV)  
#
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
This parameter is used during HPID reads and writes. For reads, at the beginning of a word transfer (HPI32) or the first half-word transfer (HPI16)  
on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until  
the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads the requested data into HPID. For writes, HRDY goes high if the internal write buffer is  
full.  
94  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
HAS  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
HHWIL  
4
3
3
HSTROBE  
HCS  
15  
9
15  
9
7
16  
HD[15:0] (output)  
HRDY  
1st half-word  
2nd half-word  
6
8
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 39. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
HAS  
19  
11  
19  
11  
10  
10  
10  
10  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
11  
11  
11  
11  
10  
10  
HHWIL  
4
3
HSTROBE  
18  
18  
HCS  
15  
15  
7
9
16  
9
HD[15:0] (output)  
HRDY  
1st half-word  
2nd half-word  
6
8
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 40. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Used)  
95  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
HAS  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
HHWIL  
3
4
HSTROBE  
HCS  
12  
12  
13  
2nd half-word  
13  
HD[15:0] (input)  
1st half-word  
6
14  
HRDY  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 41. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
19  
11  
19  
HAS  
11  
11  
11  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
11  
11  
HHWIL  
3
4
HSTROBE  
18  
12  
18  
HCS  
12  
13  
13  
HD[15:0] (input)  
1st half-word  
2nd half-word  
6
14  
HRDY  
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 42. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Used)  
96  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
HAS  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
1
1
2
2
3
HSTROBE  
HCS  
7
9
15  
HD[31:0] (output)  
HRDY  
6
8
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 43. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
19  
HAS  
11  
11  
10  
10  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
18  
3
HSTROBE  
HCS  
7
9
15  
HD[31:0] (output)  
HRDY  
6
8
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 44. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Used)  
97  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
HAS  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
1
1
2
2
3
HSTROBE  
HCS  
12  
13  
HD[31:0] (input)  
6
14  
HRDY  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 45. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
19  
HAS  
11  
10  
10  
HCNTL[1:0]  
HR/W  
11  
3
18  
HSTROBE  
HCS  
12  
13  
HD[31:0] (input)  
6
14  
HRDY  
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.  
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.  
Figure 46. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Used)  
98  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) TIMING  
†‡  
timing requirements for PCLK (see Figure 47)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
§
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, PCLK  
30(or 8P )  
ns  
ns  
c(PCLK)  
Pulse duration, PCLK high  
Pulse duration, PCLK low  
v/t slew rate, PCLK  
11  
11  
1
w(PCLKH)  
w(PCLKL)  
sr(PCLK)  
ns  
4
V/ns  
§
For 3.3 V operation, the reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V  
ILP  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
Select the parameter value of 30 ns or 8P, whichever is greater.  
MAX and V MIN.  
IHP  
0.4 DV  
Peak to Peak for  
3.3V signaling  
V MIN  
DD  
1
4
2
PCLK  
3
4
Figure 47. PCLK Timing  
timing requirements for PCI reset (see Figure 48)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
1
MAX  
1
2
t
t
Pulse duration, PRST  
ms  
w(PRST)  
Setup time, PCLK active before PRST high  
100  
µs  
su(PCLKA-PRSTH)  
PCLK  
PRST  
1
2
Figure 48. PCI Reset (PRST) Timing  
99  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
timing requirements for PCI inputs (see Figure 49)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
7
MAX  
5
6
t
t
Setup time, input valid before PCLK high  
Hold time, input valid after PCLK high  
ns  
ns  
su(IV-PCLKH)  
0
h(IV-PCLKH)  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for PCI outputs (see Figure 49)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Delay time, PCLK high to output valid  
11  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(PCLKH-OV)  
d(PCLKH-OIV)  
d(PCLKH-OLZ)  
d(PCLKH-OHZ)  
Delay time, PCLK high to output invalid  
2
2
Delay time, PCLK high to output low impedance  
Delay time, PCLK high to output high impedance  
28  
PCLK  
1
2
Valid  
PCI Output  
PCI Input  
3
4
Valid  
5
6
Figure 49. PCI Intput/Output Timing  
100  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
timing requirements for serial EEPROM interface (see Figure 50)  
−300  
UNIT  
NO.  
MIN  
50  
0
MAX  
8
9
t
t
Setup time, XSP_DI valid before XSP_CLK high  
Hold time, XSP_DI valid after XSP_CLK high  
ns  
ns  
su(DIV-CLKH)  
h(CLKH-DIV)  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for serial EEPROM interface  
(see Figure 50)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
Pulse duration, XSP_CS low  
UNIT  
MIN  
NOM  
4092P  
0
MAX  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
w(CSL)  
Delay time, XSP_CLK low to XSP_CS low  
Delay time, XSP_CS high to XSP_CLK high  
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK high  
d(CLKL-CSL)  
d(CSH-CLKH)  
w(CLKH)  
2046P  
2046P  
2046P  
2046P  
2046P  
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK low  
w(CLKL)  
Output setup time, XSP_DO valid before XSP_CLK high  
Output hold time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high  
osu(DOV-CLKH)  
oh(CLKH-DOV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
2
1
XSP_CS  
3
4
5
XSP_CLK  
7
6
XSP_DO  
9
8
XSP_DI  
Figure 50. PCI Serial EEPROM Interface Timing  
101  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING  
timing requirements for McBSP (see Figure 51)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
4P or 6.67  
MAX  
‡§¶  
2
3
t
t
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X ext  
CLKR/X ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
ns  
ns  
c(CKRX)  
#
− 1  
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low  
0.5t  
w(CKRX)  
c(CKRX)  
9
5
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low  
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low  
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
su(FRH-CKRL)  
h(CKRL-FRH)  
su(DRV-CKRL)  
h(CKRL-DRV)  
su(FXH-CKXL)  
h(CKXL-FXH)  
1.3  
6
3
8
7
0.9  
3
8
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low  
3.1  
9
10  
11  
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low  
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low  
1.3  
6
3
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.  
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing  
requirements.  
§
#
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.  
Use whichever value is greater.  
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the resonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.  
102  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP (see Figure 51)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated  
from CLKS input  
1
t
1.4  
10  
ns  
d(CKSH-CKRXH)  
§¶#  
4P or 6.67  
2
3
4
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X int  
CLKR/X int  
CLKR int  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
ns  
ns  
ns  
c(CKRX)  
||  
C − 1  
||  
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low  
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid  
C + 1  
w(CKRX)  
−2.1  
−1.7  
3
3
9
4
9
d(CKRH-FRV)  
9
t
t
t
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid  
ns  
ns  
ns  
d(CKXH-FXV)  
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
d(CKXH-DXV)  
1.7  
−3.9  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last  
data bit from CLKX high  
12  
13  
2.0  
−3.9 + D1k  
4 + D2k  
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid  
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid  
2.0 + D1k  
9 + D2k  
h
h
FSX int  
FSX ext  
−2.3 + D1  
5.6 + D2  
14  
t
ns  
d(FXH-DXV)  
ONLY applies when in data  
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode  
h
h
1.9 + D1  
9 + D2  
§
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.  
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.  
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing  
requirements.  
#
||  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.  
Use whichever value is greater.  
C = H or L  
S = sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)  
=
sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).  
kExtra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.  
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0  
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P  
hExtra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.  
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0  
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P  
103  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
CLKS  
1
2
3
3
CLKR  
4
4
FSR (int)  
5
6
FSR (ext)  
7
8
DR  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
2
3
3
CLKX  
9
FSX (int)  
11  
10  
FSX (ext)  
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)  
13  
14  
13  
Bit(n-1)  
12  
DX  
Bit 0  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bit only when XDATDLY 0  
Figure 51. McBSP Timing  
104  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
timing requirements for FSR when GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 52)  
−300  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
4
MAX  
1
2
t
t
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high  
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high  
ns  
ns  
su(FRH-CKSH)  
4
h(CKSH-FRH)  
CLKS  
1
2
FSR external  
CLKR/X (no need to resync)  
CLKR/X (needs resync)  
Figure 52. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1  
105  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 53)  
−300  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
12  
4
MAX  
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low  
2 − 12P  
5 + 24P  
ns  
ns  
su(DRV-CKXL)  
h(CKXL-DRV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or  
†‡  
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 53)  
−300  
§
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
MAX  
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low  
T − 2 T + 3  
L − 2 L + 3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
h(CKXL-FXL)  
d(FXL-CKXH)  
d(CKXH-DXV)  
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high  
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid  
−2  
4
12P+2.8  
20P+17  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
CLKX low  
6
t
L − 2 L + 3  
ns  
dis(CKXL-DXHZ)  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
FSX high  
7
8
t
t
4P+3  
12P+17  
16P+17  
ns  
ns  
dis(FXH-DXHZ)  
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid  
8P+1.8  
d(FXL-DXV)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)  
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S  
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX  
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.  
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP  
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP  
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock  
(CLKX).  
106  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
CLKX  
FSX  
1
2
8
7
6
3
DX  
DR  
Bit 0  
Bit(n-1)  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
4
5
Bit 0  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
Figure 53. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0  
107  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 54)  
−300  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
12  
4
MAX  
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high  
2 − 12P  
5 + 24P  
ns  
ns  
su(DRV-CKXH)  
h(CKXH-DRV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or  
†‡  
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 54)  
−300  
§
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
MAX  
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low  
L − 2 L + 3  
T − 2 T + 3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
h(CKXL-FXL)  
d(FXL-CKXH)  
d(CKXL-DXV)  
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high  
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid  
−2  
4
12P+4  
12P+3  
8P+2  
20P+17  
20P+17  
16P+17  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
CLKX low  
6
t
−2  
4
ns  
ns  
dis(CKXL-DXHZ)  
7
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid  
H − 2 H + 4  
d(FXL-DXV)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)  
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S  
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX  
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.  
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP  
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP  
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock  
(CLKX).  
CLKX  
1
2
7
FSX  
DX  
6
3
Bit 0  
Bit(n-1)  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
4
5
DR  
Bit 0  
(n-2)  
(n-4)  
Figure 54. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0  
108  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 55)  
−300  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
12  
4
MAX  
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high  
2 − 12P  
5 + 24P  
ns  
ns  
su(DRV-CKXH)  
h(CKXH-DRV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or  
†‡  
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 55)  
−300  
§
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
MAX  
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high  
T − 2 T + 3  
H − 2 H + 3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
h(CKXH-FXL)  
d(FXL-CKXL)  
d(CKXL-DXV)  
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low  
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid  
−2  
4
12P + 4 20P + 17  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
CLKX high  
6
t
H − 2 H + 3  
ns  
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
FSX high  
7
8
t
t
4P + 3 12P + 17  
8P + 2 16P + 17  
ns  
ns  
dis(FXH-DXHZ)  
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid  
d(FXL-DXV)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)  
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S  
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX  
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.  
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP  
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP  
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock  
(CLKX).  
109  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
CLKX  
FSX  
1
2
8
7
6
3
DX  
DR  
Bit 0  
Bit(n-1)  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
4
5
Bit 0  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
Figure 55. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1  
110  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
†‡  
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 56)  
−300  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
12  
4
MAX  
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high  
2 − 12P  
5 + 24P  
ns  
ns  
su(DRV-CKXH)  
h(CKXH-DRV)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or  
†‡  
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 56)  
−300  
§
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MIN  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
MAX  
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high  
H − 2 H + 3  
T − 2 T + 1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
h(CKXH-FXL)  
d(FXL-CKXL)  
d(CKXH-DXV)  
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low  
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid  
−2  
4
12P + 4 20P + 17  
12P + 3 20P + 17  
8P + 2 16P + 17  
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from  
CLKX high  
6
t
−2  
4
ns  
ns  
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
7
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid  
L − 2 L + 4  
d(FXL-DXV)  
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.  
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)  
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S  
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero  
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX  
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.  
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP  
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP  
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock  
(CLKX).  
111  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)  
CLKX  
FSX  
DX  
1
2
7
6
3
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit(n-1)  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
4
5
DR  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
(n-4)  
Figure 56. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1  
112  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
TIMER TIMING  
timing requirements for timer inputs (see Figure 57)  
−300  
UNIT  
NO.  
MIN  
8P  
MAX  
1
2
t
t
Pulse duration, TINP high  
Pulse duration, TINP low  
ns  
ns  
w(TINPH)  
8P  
w(TINPL)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for timer outputs  
(see Figure 57)  
−300  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
3
4
t
t
Pulse duration, TOUT high  
Pulse duration, TOUT low  
8P−3  
8P−3  
ns  
ns  
w(TOUTH)  
w(TOUTL)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
2
1
TINPx  
4
3
TOUTx  
Figure 57. Timer Timing  
113  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO) PORT TIMING  
†‡  
timing requirements for GPIO inputs (see Figure 58)  
−300  
MIN MAX  
NO.  
UNIT  
1
2
t
t
Pulse duration, GPIx high  
Pulse duration, GPIx low  
8P  
8P  
ns  
ns  
w(GPIH)  
w(GPIL)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize the GPIx  
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 12P to allow the DSP enough time to access  
the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for GPIO outputs  
(see Figure 58)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
24P − 8  
24P − 8  
MAX  
3
4
t
t
Pulse duration, GPOx high  
Pulse duration, GPOx low  
ns  
ns  
w(GPOH)  
w(GPOL)  
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.33 ns.  
This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the GPIO  
is dependent upon internal bus activity.  
2
1
GPIx  
4
3
GPOx  
Figure 58. GPIO Port Timing  
114  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋꢌ ꢍꢎꢏꢐꢑ ꢋ ꢒꢀ ꢎꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂꢋ ꢓ ꢒꢔꢕ ꢐꢖ ꢑ ꢆꢍ ꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
JTAG TEST-PORT TIMING  
timing requirements for JTAG test port (see Figure 59)  
−300  
UNIT  
NO.  
MIN  
35  
10  
9
MAX  
1
3
4
t
t
t
Cycle time, TCK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
c(TCK)  
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high  
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high  
su(TDIV-TCKH)  
h(TCKH-TDIV)  
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for JTAG test port  
(see Figure 59)  
−300  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
2
t
0
18  
ns  
d(TCKL-TDOV)  
1
TCK  
TDO  
2
2
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST  
Figure 59. JTAG Test-Port Timing  
115  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉꢉ  
ꢊ ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢏꢐ ꢑꢋ ꢒ ꢀ ꢎ ꢋ ꢓꢋ ꢀꢔꢕ ꢂ ꢋ ꢓꢒ ꢔꢕ ꢐ ꢖꢑ ꢆꢍꢂ ꢂꢑ ꢖ  
SPRS196H − MARCH 2002 − REVISED JULY 2004  
MECHANICAL DATA  
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA — GLZ and ZLZ mechanical  
packages.  
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [GLZ]  
NO.  
1
°C/W  
1.55  
9.1  
Air Flow (m/s )  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
Junction-to-case  
N/A  
N/A  
0.00  
0.5  
JC  
JB  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JT  
JB  
2
Junction-to-board  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-package top  
Junction-to-board  
3
17.9  
15.02  
13.4  
11.89  
0.5  
4
5
1.0  
6
2.00  
N/A  
N/A  
7
Psi  
Psi  
8
7.4  
m/s = meters per second  
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [ZLZ]  
NO.  
°C/W  
1.55  
9.1  
Air Flow (m/s )  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
RΘ  
Junction-to-case  
N/A  
N/A  
0.00  
0.5  
JC  
JB  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JT  
JB  
Junction-to-board  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-free air  
Junction-to-package top  
Junction-to-board  
17.9  
15.02  
13.4  
11.89  
0.5  
1.0  
2.00  
N/A  
N/A  
Psi  
Psi  
7.4  
m/s = meters per second  
The following mechanical package diagram(s) reflect the most up-to-date mechanical data released for these  
designated device(s).  
116  
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443  
 
ꢀ ꢁꢂꢃꢄ ꢅꢆꢂ ꢄꢇ ꢈ ꢄꢉꢄ  
MPBG175B − OCTOBER 2000 − REVISED FEBRUARY 2002  
GLZ (S-PBGA-N532)  
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY  
23,10  
22,90  
SQ  
20,00 TYP  
0,80  
0,40  
AF  
AD  
AB  
Y
AE  
AC  
AA  
W
U
V
T
R
P
N
A1 Corner  
M
K
L
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
5
7
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25  
2
4
6
8
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26  
Heat Slug  
Bottom View  
3,30 MAX  
1,00 NOM  
Seating Plane  
0,12  
0,55  
0,45  
M
0,10  
0,45  
0,35  
4201884/C 11/01  
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.  
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.  
C. Thermally enhanced plastic package with heat slug (HSL)  
D. Flip chip application only  
1
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications,  
enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue  
any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing  
orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms  
and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.  
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in  
accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI  
deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all  
parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.  
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for  
their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products  
and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards.  
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right,  
copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process  
in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services  
does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof.  
Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property  
of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.  
Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without  
alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction  
of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for  
such altered documentation.  
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that  
product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and  
is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.  
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application  
solutions:  
Products  
Applications  
Audio  
Amplifiers  
amplifier.ti.com  
www.ti.com/audio  
Data Converters  
dataconverter.ti.com  
Automotive  
www.ti.com/automotive  
DSP  
dsp.ti.com  
Broadband  
Digital Control  
Military  
www.ti.com/broadband  
www.ti.com/digitalcontrol  
www.ti.com/military  
Interface  
Logic  
interface.ti.com  
logic.ti.com  
Power Mgmt  
Microcontrollers  
power.ti.com  
Optical Networking  
Security  
www.ti.com/opticalnetwork  
www.ti.com/security  
www.ti.com/telephony  
www.ti.com/video  
microcontroller.ti.com  
Telephony  
Video & Imaging  
Wireless  
www.ti.com/wireless  
Mailing Address:  
Texas Instruments  
Post Office Box 655303 Dallas, Texas 75265  
Copyright 2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated  

相关型号:

TMX320C6411ZLZ300

FIXED-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
TI

TMX320C6411ZLZ5E0

FIXED-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
TI

TMX320C6411ZLZA300

FIXED-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
TI

TMX320C6411ZLZA5E0

FIXED-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
TI

TMX320C6412GDK

Signal Processor
TI

TMX320C6412GNZ

Signal Processor
TI

TMX320C6413GTS

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMX320C6413GTS400

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMX320C6413GTS500

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMX320C6413GTSA400

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMX320C6413GTSA500

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMX320C6413ZTS400

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI